Home

Sony HDW-F900R HDCAM Operation Manual

1. LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 switches AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 switches CUE IN switch LINE AES EBU MIC selectors 48V OFF switches AUDIO OUT connector AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors DC OUT 12V connector Audio functions 2 LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 audio channel 1 and channel 2 recording level controls Adjust the audio levels of channels 1 and 2 when the AUDIO SELECT switches are set to MANUAL Audio Functions AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 audio channel 1 and channel 2 adjustment method selection switches Select the audio level adjustment method for each of audio channels 1 and 2 AUTO Select this setting for automatic adjustment MANUAL Select this setting for manual adjustment AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 audio input selection switches CH 1 CH 2 switches Select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio channels 1 and 2 FRONT The input signal source is the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector REAR The input signal source is the audio equipment connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors WIRELESS The input signal source is an optional WRR 855A 855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit CH 3 CH 4 switches Select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 F front The input signal source is the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector R rear The input sig
2. 0 12 Table of Contents 5 6 4 5 3 Setting the User Bits 5 24 jcsancfcevdelsadin acienisagoessmavieseats 13 4 5 4 Synchronizing the Time Code ssssesseeesssessesseeeseeessee 13 Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings Table of Contents 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 Menu Organization and Operation csseeeeeeees 75 5 1 1 enw Organization noi a n E a 75 5 1 2 Basic Menu Operations cccececcecssececeeececeeeeeesseeeesaes 76 5 1 3 Editing the USER Menulsi cebisiescedsnerceasiecaaees ceeds 78 5 1 4 Adding Functions to be Assigned to Assignable Switches 80 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen 0 82 5 2 1 Layout of the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen 82 5 2 2 Selecting Display ems ssc cccstesssyoavisaecescrdeatskacsoesieantect 84 5 2 3 Display Modes and Setting Change Confirmation Adjustment Progress Messages csscccssseceesreeeeeeeeees 85 5 2 4 Selecting the Items for Which the LED is to Light 85 5 2 5 Setting Marker Display sccsssccieccecssccsadeceeedsccassascuesastedans 87 5 2 6 Setting the Viewfinder ix cs5 csseasscadseatsdecesceondesemenaaniemsaeers 88 5 2 7 Recording Shot Data Superimposed on the Color Bars 88 5 2 8 Setting the Shot ID sssesessseeesesessseesseessersseesssesssresseesse 89 5 2 9 Displaying the Status Confirmation Windows 91 5 2 10 Confirming the Image of the Return Video Signal in the Wie WAC ETA o A
3. Item Settings Default Description ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt OFF F MIC MONO 5600K See 5 3 5 Assigning STEREO PICTURE Functions to Assignable CACHE ON OFF Switches on page 96 TEST OUT CHARACTER MARKER RE TAKE ATW RETURN VIDEO LENS RET REC SWITCH TURBO SWITCH TELE FILE MARK ZEBRA 5600K etc ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt OFF F MIC MONO F MIC STEREO PICTURE CACHE ON OFF TEST OUT CHARACTER MARKER ZEBRA 5600K etc TURBO SW OFF F MIC MONO TURBO STEREO PICTURE CACHE ON OFF TEST OUT CHARACTER MARKER RE TAKE ATW RETURN VIDEO LENS RET REC SWITCH TURBO SWITCH TELE FILE MARK ZEBRA 5600K etc FRONT MIC SELECT MONO STREO STREO _ Selects stereo or monaural when a stereo microphone is connected to the front MC IN connector DF NDF DF NDF DF Switches between drop frame DF mode and non drop frame NDF mode END SEARCH OFF ON OFF Turns the END SEARCH function on off CACHE INTVAL REC OFF CACHE A INT OFF See 3 2 5 Starting a Shoot M INT with a Few Seconds of Pre CACHE or 2 3 4 516 8 SEC OSEC 2t0red Picture Data Picture CACHE REC TIME HKDW 703 on page 41 A INT 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 5 MIN See 3 2 6 Shooting Picture TAKE TOTAL TIME l at Intervals Interval Rec 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 15 20 Function with the HKDW 30 40 50 70 100 H 703 on page 43 A INT 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 5 SEC REC TIME SEC 1 to 50 MIN A INT and M I
4. Display panel Indicators in viewfinder Warning Problem VTR operation Action to take sounds Warning Status 3 Lit o sella thee w 1 flash s 4 beeps s status I wi D indication gt x 4 flashes s 1 beep s WARNING REC tally BATT D Continuous beep RF Lit 1 sen Sox ejo oey 1 Video After clogged head Clean the head If i head gap is detected recording is still clogged or recording continues substandard turn off the problem in but may be power and consult your recording substandard Sony service circuit representative SERVO Lit Sex Sex Servo lock Recording Turn off the power and lost continuous but may contact your Sony be substandard service representative This indication may be given momentarily when the tape starts moving but this does not indicate a problem HUMID Lit x Jet ejoj ojo 1 Condensa Recording Stop the tape and wait tion on the continues but stops until the HUMID indicator eon 2 optical if the tape sticks to disappears pickup the head drum Playback fast forward and rewind do not operate SLACK Lit ya 3 A The tape VTR stops An error Remove the cassette by i cannot be code appears inthe the method described in wound time code display the Maintenance Manual properly section of the Close the cassette lid display panel Look without loading a up the error code in cassette turn off the the Maintenance p
5. T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The menu page accessed last appears on the viewfinder screen 2 Turn the MENU knob until the VF DISP 1 or VF DISP 2 page appears then push the MENU knob to select that page Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen The current setting is displayed on the right of each item O40UF DISP 1 gt UF DISP EXTENDER FILTER WHITE 5600K U D D D D D D D D You can select the following items to be displayed on the screen on the VF DISP 1 or VF DISP 2 page VF DISP 1 page Item Description VF DISP Turning the viewfinder display on or off 1 VF DISP MODE Selecting the display mode 2 DISP EXTENDER _ Extender indicator DISP FILTER Types of ND and CC filters DISP WHITE White balance memory indicator DISP 5600K 5600K indicator DISP GAIN Gain indicator DISP SHUTTER Shutter speed and ECS mode indicator DISP AUDIO Audio level indicator DISP TAPE Remaining tape indicator 1 The viewfinder display can be also turned on or off by using the DISPLAY switch on the viewfinder 2 For detailed information on the display mode see 5 2 3 Display Modes and Setting Change Confirmation Adjustment Progress Messages on page 85 VF DISP 2 page Item Description DISP IRIS Iris opening indicator DISP ZOOM Zoom position indicator DISP COLOR Displays the color temperature TEMP DISP BATT Displays the battery voltage RE
6. Viewfinder HDVF 20A HD Electronic Viewfinder HDVF C30W HD Electronic Viewfinder Audio input signals External microphone ECM 674 678 or similar microphone CAC 12 Microphone Holder Analog audio equipment CCXA 53 audio cable WRR 861A 861B 862A 862B UHF Portable Tuner WRR 855A 855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit Control signals RM B150 B750 Remote Control Unit Memory Stick see page 139 Extension board Product Model name Down Converter Board HKDW 702 Picture Cache Board HKDW 703 2 3 Pull Down Down HKDW 902R Converter Board Slow Shutter and HKDW 905R Image Inverter Board Video output Video monitor for color image check during shooting Audio output Audio equipment for monitoring XLR 5 pin connector Example of System Configuration 1 3 Precautions Use and Storage Do not subject the unit to severe shocks The internal mechanism may be damaged or the body warped After use Always turn off the power Before storing the unit for a long period Remove the battery pack Use and storage locations Store in a level ventilated place Avoid using or storing the unit in the following places e Places subject to temperature extremes e Very damp places e Places subject to severe vibration e Ne
7. In the freeze frame mode you cannot start recording pictures on the tape To start recording the shot pictures again push the STOP button to finish playback then push the VTR START button e When changing to the recording pause mode from the freeze frame mode by using the end search function or positioning function for continuous recording push the STOP button first then push the RET button on the lens When remotely controlling the camcorder from an optional RM B150 B750 Remote Control Unit You can perform the same operation from an RM B150 B750 Freezing a Picture During Playback 57 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey g saydeyo WHI yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey E Ja deyo HAI 3 6 Setting the Stand by off Timer During Rec Pause The VTR SAVE STBY switch allows you to control the VTR power mode during pauses in recording rec pause or when stopped However even in the standby mode with the VTR SAVE STBY switch set to STBY you can set the VTR in such a way that the mode is automatically switched from the standby mode to save mode when the tape does not run for a preset time using the VTR MODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu 1 Follow steps 1 to 4 in Setting for recording good shot marks on the LTC UBIT area on the tape page 39 to display the VTR MODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to STBY OFF TIMER then push the MENU knob 100VTR MODE REC TALLY BLINK ON REC STAR
8. selection FILTER selector outer CC filter knob setting A 5600K B 3200K C 4300K D 6300K FILTER selector inner knob setting and ND filter selection FILTER selector ND filter inner knob setting 1 Clear 2 1 4 ND 3 1 46 ND 4 1 54 ND If the setting of the FILTER selector is changed a message reporting the setting appears for about 3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen in display mode 3 Place a white test card under the same lighting conditions as those for the subject to be shot and zoom in to it Alternatively any white object such as a cloth or a wall can be used The absolute minimum white area is as follows Rectangle centered on the screen The lengths of the sides are 70 of the length and width of the screen The white object must be within the rectangle and have an area of at least 10 of the screen Make sure there are no bright spots in the rectangle Adjust the lens iris Manually adjusted lens Set the iris to an appropriate setting Lens with automatic iris Set the automatic manual switch on the lens to automatic Push the AUTO W B BAL switch to WHT and then release the switch AUTO W B BAL switch The switch returns to the center position and the adjustment is executed During adjustment the message AWB EXECUTING is displayed on the viewfin
9. DF NDF DF NDF DF Sets DF or NDF mode DF Drop frame mode NDF Non drop frame mode EXT LK UBIT INT EXT INT Sets whether the LTC UBIT setup value locks to an INT or an EXT source when the time code is locked to an external source INT Internal lock EXT External lock LTC UBIT FIX TIME FIX Sets the data to be recorded in UBIT of LTC FIX Records the data that is set by the user TIME Records the present time VITC UBIT FIX TIME FIX Sets the data to be recorded in UBIT of VITC FIX Records the data that is set by the user TIME Records the present time WATCH AUTO ADJ OFF ON ON Turns the automatic time correction function of the built in clock on off With ON the time of the built in clock matches the time data of the user bits of an external time code UBIT GROUP ID 000 101 000 Selects the UBIT GROUP ID M10 VTR MODE REC TALLY BLINK OFF ON ON Turns the tally illumination control on off in the event of BATTERY BEFORE END TAPE BEFORE END REC START BEEP OFF ON OFF Turns the alarm sound at REC START STOP on off LCD DISPLAY HOLD TIMER OFF CONT TIMER Sets the time code TC display after power off as follows TIMER The TC display turns off after the elapse of the time set by the LCD HOLD TIMER below OFF Not displayed CONT Displayed LCD HOLD TIMER 1H 3H 8H Sets the duration of time af
10. For information about marker display see 5 2 5 Setting Marker Display on page 87 ON setting was made in the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu or with related switches are displayed at the top and bottom of the screen Messages that give details of the settings and adjustment progress and results can also be made to appear for about 3 seconds while settings are being changed during adjustment and after adjustment 5 2 1 Layout of the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen All items that can be displayed on the viewfinder screen are shown below Extender Zoom position Color temperature UHF wireless microphone reception level DC IN battery voltage or remaining capacity Model name and serial number Date and time ID number Time code 5600K indication HDW F900R 06 07 21 12 10 SHOT ID 1 4 LEVEL TOO HIGH 3 1 1000 E O indicator D Setting change and adjustment progress message display area Operation error message display area Iris setting auto iris override Remaining tape White balance memory Filter O and appear only when color bars are displayed Zoom position This indicator appears only when you use a lens that has a zoom position display function It indicates the approximate position of the variator D of the zoom lens between wide angle and telephoto Exte
11. Lens mount special bayonet mount Use this for mounting the lens Lens mount lever After inserting the lens in the lens mount rotate the lens mount ring with this lever to lock the lens in position Lens mount cap Remove this cap by pushing up the lens mounting lever When no lens is mounted keep this cap fitted for protection from dust LENS connector 12 pin Fit the lens cable to this connector Contact your Sony representative for more information about the lenses you can use Accessory Attachments 18 Tripod mount When using the camcorder on a tripod attach the tripod adaptor optional Shoulder pad You can move the shoulder pad forwards or backwards by raising up the shoulder pad locking lever Do this to ensure the best balance when shooting with the camcorder on your shoulder For details see 7 8 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position on page 126 2 3 Audio Functions Built in speaker O EARPHONE jack rear ALARM volume control MONITOR volume control B MONITOR switch and CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch O EARPHONE jack front Audio functions 1 Microphone This is a supplied directivity super cardioid stereo microphone with an external power supply 48 V system Assigning the F MIC MONO STEREO function to the ASSIGN 1 switch ASSIGN 2 switch or TURBO GAIN button allows you to switch the output signal of the microphone connected to the MIC I
12. MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch Picture Cache Recording start point time 8 seconds For 50i 25PsF 24PsF 23 98PsF format 7 seconds For 59 94i 29 97PsF format VTR STBY mode About 8 seconds before About 7 seconds before VTR SAVE mode About 5 seconds before About 4 seconds before 6 seconds About 6 seconds before About 4 seconds before 5 seconds About 5 seconds before About 4 seconds before 4 seconds About 4 seconds before About 4 seconds before 3 seconds About 3 seconds before About 3 seconds before T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The last accessed menu page appears on the viewfinder screen 2 Tur the MENU knob until the FUNCTION 1 page appears When the question mark appears at the left corner of the title page you can switch the pages Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise to display the desired page 1 D30FUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ATW ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt 3 OFF TURBO SW TURBO FRONT MIC SELECT STREO F NDE DF D END SEARCH OFF CACHE INTVAL REC OFF 3 Push the MENU knob Recording 41 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey g saydeyD WHI yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey E Ja deyo HAI A gt mark appears on the left of the currently selected item and a mark appears on the left of the setting 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to CACHE INTVAL REC O3OFUNCTION1
13. STATUS ABNORMAL STATUS FUNCTION STATUS AUDIO Item Description STATUS Selects whether or not the ABNORMAL ABNORMAL window is displayed ON or OFF STATUS Selects whether or not the FUNCTION FUNCTION _ window is displayed ON or OFF STATUS Selects whether or not the STATUS AUDIO AUDIO window is displayed ON or OFF Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item you want to set then push the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob to select whether or not to display the selected window then push the MENU knob The mark returns to a mark and the mark returns to a mark To continue setting other windows repeat steps 3 and 4 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF 5 2 10 Confirming the Image of the Return Video Signal in the Viewfinder The GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu allows you to set whether or not to see the image of the return video signal in the viewfinder You can confirm only the image of HD Y return video signal T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON while holding down the MENU knob Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen The TOP menu appears Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to MAINTENANCE then push the MENU knob If this is the first time the MAINTENANCE menu has been displayed the
14. The frame frequency selected on the NEXT line is displayed on a colored background The message PLEASE POWER OFF ON TO CHANGE FORMAT appears Some frame frequencies are abbreviated when displayed on the menu Menu display Frame frequency 59 94 59 94i 50i 50i 23 98 23 98PSF 24PsF 24PsF 25PsF 25PsF 29 97 29 97PSF Set the POWER switch to OFF once and then to ON The camcorder will operate at the desired frame frequency Even if you do not push the MENU knob to execute the change the frame frequency selected in step 7 becomes effective only by turning the power of the camcorder off and on again Setting the Frame Frequency Overview 1 1 Features The HDW F900R camcorder is a color video camera with 1920 H x 1080 V effective picture elements it incorporates 2 3 inch CCDs with 2 000 000 picture elements and an HDCAM format recorder combined integrally The camcorder allows you to record and play back with a frame frequency of 59 941 50i 29 97PsF or 25PsF in addition to the basic frame frequency of 24PsF and 23 98PsF The introduction of new integrated circuit technology LSI for processing the HD digital signal improves the image quality even further and simplifies setup initialization operations 1 1 1 Camera Features 2 3 inch Power HAD CCDs The high sensitivity low smear 2 3 inch Power HAD CCDs FIT type CCDs provide high image quality which puts
15. Using the viewfinder rotation bracket By fitting a BKW 401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket not supplied you can rotate the viewfinder out of the way so that your right leg does not hit the viewfinder while you are carrying the camcorder For more information refer to the BKW 401 manual 7 2 4 Detaching the Eyepiece Removing the eyepiece gives a clearer view of the screen from further away It is also easy to remove dust from the viewfinder screen and mirror when the eyepiece is detached Turnthe eyepiece locking ring fully counterclockwise to align the red marks on the locking ring and the viewfinder barrel Red mark Red mark flees Locking ring Line up the red marks 2 Detach the eyepiece To reattach the eyepiece 1 Align the red marks on the eyepiece locking ring and the viewfinder barrel 2 Ali gn the red mark on the end of the eyepiece end with the red marks on the eyepiece locking ring and the viewfinder barrel Then insert the eyepiece into the viewfinder barrel Red mark on the end of the eyepiece 3 Tum the eyepiece locking ring clockwise until its LOCK arrow points at the red mark on the viewfinder barrel When the eyecup is worn out replace it with a new one service part number 3 723 079 03 Adjusting the Viewfinder Japioowey ou dq Bumes z Ja deyo HH Mh 119 Jepiooweg y dN Bume
16. When the load is completed the message COMPLETE appears and the ACCESS indicator goes off The USER FILE page appears again 5 Toend the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF If data cannot be loaded If one of the following error messages appears during or after the load operation then the data was not loaded Data load error messages Error message Cause Action NO MEMORY No Memory Insert or reinsert the STICK flashing Stick is inserted Memory Stick MEMORY STICK Circuit or Recheck and ERROR Memory Stick consult your Sony flashing fault representative OTHER The Memory Do not try to load MODELS FILE _ Stick contains data saved from flashing data that cannot another camcorder be loaded into this camcorder Saving and Loading Scene Files 6 2 Saving and Loading Scene Files You can save various settings for shooting a particular scene as a scene file Loading the scene file you can quickly recreate setup conditions suitable for the scene You can save up to five scene files in the camcorder memory and up to 100 scene files in a Memory Stick You can also load data from the Memory Stick into the camcorder memory Data that can be saved in a scene file You can save the following data in a scene file e Values adjusted using the PAINT menu except the items that return to the default values when power is on such as OU
17. the item O2OWHITE COLOR TEMP lt A gt 3200 C TEMP BAL lt A gt 0 GAIN B_GAIN OFF 3200 Item Description COLOR Sets the color temperature to the TEMP lt A gt desired value Adjust the value while looking at the real image because error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature C TEMP BAL Adjusts the value more precisely lt A gt when the color temperature adjustment through COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory R GAIN lt A gt Only the value of R GAIN is changed B GAIN lt A gt Only the value of B GAIN is changed 5600K lt A gt Provides the same effect when the 5600K filter is used by setting to ON The above table shows the adjustment of the white balance of channel A Items followed by lt B gt are used to adjust the white balance of channel B 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item you want to set then push MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 5 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting then push the MENU knob The mark returns to a mark and the mark returns to a mark To continue setting other items repeat steps 4 and 5 6 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF 5 3 4 Specifying an Offset for the Auto White Balance Setting By setting an offset for the value of auto white balance you can make the picture warm
18. xepu 167 x pul 168 K KNEE 148 KNEE2 148 L LCD LIGHT switch 32 Lens mounting 120 LENS connector 18 LENS FILE 146 Lens file 99 LENS FILE 1 162 LENS FILE 2 162 LENS FILE 3 163 LENS FILE page 99 Lens locking lever 18 Lens mount 18 Lens mount cap 18 LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls 20 LEVEL ADJ 153 LIGHT connector 18 Light shoe 18 LIGHT switch 17 LINE AES EBU MIC selectors 21 LOCK knob 23 MAINTENANCE menu 76 Manual Interval Rec mode 47 MARKER 1 143 MARKER page 87 MARKER 2 144 Marker Display 87 MEMORY STICK 163 Memory Stick compartment 27 MEMORY STICK OPEN button 27 MEMORY STICK page 114 MENU knob 27 MENU ON OFF switch 27 Menu Organization 75 MIC IN connector 19 MIC LEVEL control 19 Microphone 19 MLB 1M 100 53 MONITOR switch 19 MONITOR volume control 20 MTX LINEAR 150 MTX MULTI 150 N ND COMP 159 ND filter 60 Non drop frame mode 72 Index O OFFSET WHT 145 OFFSET WHT page 95 OPERATION menu 76 Operation messages 136 Operation warnings 135 OPTION BOARD 164 OUTPUT SEL 140 OUTPUT SEL page 94 Output Signals 94 OUTPUT DCC switch 24 P PAINT menu 76 PEAKING control 22 Picture Cache Function 41 Picture Cache mode 41 Picture Cache time 41 PLAY button and indicator 26 Playback in Color 52 Power Supply 17 POWER switch 17 PRESET WHT 157 PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch 30 R Rain Cover 127 REAR TALLY indicator 32 REC indicator 34 Recording Review 51 REFERENCE
19. By assigning the LENS RET function to the ASSIGN 1 switch or the TURBO GAIN button you can use the ASSIGN 1 switch or the TURBO GAIN button in the same way as the RET button on the lens For details see 5 3 5 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches on page 96 The recording review functions only works if the recording you have made is at least 3 seconds long Checking Recording and Playback 51 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey g saydeyD HHI yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey E Ja deyo HAI 3 3 2 Checking the Recording on the Color Video Monitor Playback in Color Connect an HD color video monitor with an HD SDI input connector to the HD SDI OUT connector of the camcorder By pressing the PLAY button you can view the recorded picture HD monitor HD SDI input connector HD SDI OUT HDW F900R NTSC PAL monitor SDI input connector or video input connector Video input connector 2 1 For the output signal from the HD SDI OUT connector when SDI is selected on the OUTPUT SEL page of the USER menu connect this connector to the SDI input connector When VBS is selected connect it to the video input connector 2 When SD is selected as the output signal from the TEST OUT connector connect this connector to the video input connector Notes If HD SDI OUT is set to OFF on the OUTPUT SEL page of the USER menu you cannot view the r
20. The camcorder starts recording in Auto Interval Rec mode When you use the PRE LIGHTING function recording starts after the light is switched on The actual recording to tape begins after the camcorder has saved about five seconds of video in memory so tape access is intermittent While recording in Auto Interval Rec mode the TALLY indicator green in the viewfinder flashes 4 flashes second and the message AUTO INTERVAL M S flashes on the viewfinder screen When the camcorder is capturing the picture in memory the REC indicator in the viewfinder lights After the length of time for recording on the tape REC TIME has elapsed the camcorder automatically stops recording To continue auto interval recording Press the VTR START button on the camcorder or the VTR button on the lens again The camcorder starts recording in Auto Interval Rec mode again To interrupt auto interval recording Press the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens The camcorder stops recording However the tape may run to record picture data already stored in memory To end auto interval recording You can exit Auto Interval Rec mode using the following two methods e Set the POWER switch to OFF e Set CACHE INTVAL REC to OFF on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu Time required for shooting and time required for recording on the tape Auto Interval Rec mode is effective for shooting objects that move very slowly To use this
21. When you change the time zone adjust the built in clock to local time and turn the power of the camcorder off and then on again MACHINE An identification number specific to the machine is displayed This number cannot be set or modified by users 5 3 9 Using the Hyper Gamma The Hyper Gamma is a new set of transfer functions designed to be easy to use as previous gamma curve functions and to realize a natural tone in high contrast scenes by taking full advantage of the capacity and wide dynamic range of the Power Had CCD sensor 1 Follow steps 1 2 and 3 in 5 3 3 Setting the Color Temperature Manually on page 95 to display the GAMMA page of the PAINT menu and then push the MENU knob 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to GAMMA SELECT then push the MENU knob The gt mark on the left of GAMMA SELECT changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 3 Turn the MENU knob until HG appears then push the MENU knob As you turn the MENU knob the type of gamma table changes in the following sequence STD 4 gt HG gt USER O40GAMMA i RO GAMMA STEP GAMMA MASTER GAMMA R GAMMA G GAMMA B GAMMA OUTPUT SELECT GAMMA SELECT GAM SEL HG ABOXOOOO0OUIZ x 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to GAM SEL HG then push the MENU knob 5 Turn the MENU knob to select the hyper gamma table most suitable to the shooting conditions and purpose
22. 3 2 2 Continuous Recording ssseseseeessseesseesseesseessetessresseesse 38 3 2 3 Recording Good Shot Marks s sssessesseesseessseessseessees 39 3 2 4 Recording a Recording Start Mark s es 40 3 2 5 Starting a Shoot with a Few Seconds of Pre Stored Picture Data Picture Cache Function with the HKDW 703 41 Table of Contents 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 2 6 Shooting Picture at Intervals Interval Rec Function with the HRD W703 vccsstiviecsineeciceseieseasceaieleeeudeeuese anaes 43 3 2 7 Continuous Recording on Previous Cut eee 50 3 2 8 Searching for the Last Recorded Portion and Turning on Recording Pause Mode End Search Function 51 Checking Recording and Playback cccccccccessseees 51 3 3 1 Checking the Last Two Seconds of the Recording Recording Review wis waseseseasavaeretecssnssaenacdesnossiteavesastixetons 51 3 3 2 Checking the Recording on the Color Video Monitor Playback in Gl OT ss accoassing ccancecersasalansctvatavaesussdecsaeueeeesees 52 3 3 3 Checking the Camera Picture on the Viewfinder and or Color Video Monitor sssseeeseeeseseessreeresrersessrerrerseesresees 52 Recording the Recording Start Time Code onto the Memory Label Tele File 2 cssssceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 53 3 4 1 Recording the Recording Start Time Code onto the Memory Labelin ann a 53 3 4 2 Recording a Tele File Mark OK NG KP onto the Memory abe a o a O ai 53 3 4 3 Warning Error Messages in
23. ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ATW ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt OFF TURBO SW TURBO FRONT MIC SELECT STREP DF NDF END SEARCH OFF CACHE INTUAL REC OFF Recording Turn the MENU knob until A INT appears As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes in the following sequence OFF gt CACHE lt gt A INT lt gt M INT When A INT appears the camcorder is in Auto Interval Rec mode The TALLY indicator green in the viewfinder flashes one flash second while the camcorder is in this mode Also TAKE TOTAL TIME REC TIME and PRE LIGHTING appear O3OFUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW puke ASSIGN SW lt 2 TURBO SW TURBO EN ae SELECT STREO ENO NS EARCH OFF SEACHE ees REC A IN REC SLIME SSEC PRE LIGHTING OFF Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of CACHE INTVAL REC changes to a mark and the camcorder enters the item selection mode Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to TAKE TOTAL TIME OSOFUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ATW Peele a lt 2 gt OFF TURBO FRONT Nic SELECT STREO Dr ANDE BEE CACHE INTUAL REC A INT TAKE_TOTAL TIME REC TIME SEC PRE LIGHTING OFF Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of TAKE TOTAL TIME changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 10 Turn the MENU knob until the desired setting of TAKE TOTAL TIME appears As you turn the MENU knob the setting of TAKE TOTAL TIME changes in the following seq
24. ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt TURBO SW TURBO FRONT MIC SELECT STREO F NDF DF END SEARCH OFF CACHE INTVAL REC OFF 5 Push the MENU knob O3OFUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ATW ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt OFF TURBO SW TURBO FRONT MIC SELECT STREO DF NDF DF END SEARCH OFF CACHE INTVAL REC OFF The mark on the left of CACHE INTVAL REC changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 6 Turn the MENU knob until CACHE appears As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes in the following sequence OFF CACHE lt gt A INT gt M INT When CACHE appears the camcorder is in Picture Cache mode where picture sound and time code are constantly saved in memory The TALLY indicator green in the viewfinder is on while picture data is being stored in memory Also CACHE REC TIME appears Note When HD SDI REMOTE I F page 159 is set to G TLY on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu this TALLY indicator does not light in green even in Picture Cache mode O3OFUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt i gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt TURBO SW TURBO FRONT MIC SELECT STREO NDE DF END SEARCH OFF CACHE INTVAL REC CACHE CACHE REC TIME OSEC 7 Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of CACHE INTVAL REC changes to a mark and the camcorder enters the item selection mode Recording 8 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to CACHE
25. Display Items on page 84 Menu Organization and Operation 5 1 3 Editing the USER Menu The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to configure a USER menu that consists only of pages and items that you need by adding deleting or replacing pages Adding a new page The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to add a new page to the USER menu While the USER 1 EDIT page contains factory preset items the USER 2 EDIT to USER 19 EDIT pages and the ASSIGN EDIT page are all blank in their initial state You can register up to 10 items including blank lines on each of these pages while holding down the MENU knob move the MENU ON OFF switch from the OFF position to the ON position The TOP menu appears lt TOP MENU gt USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to USER MENU CUSTOMIZE then push the MENU knob If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the menu appears 000CONTENTS PAGE 1 2 3 4 5 6 r 8 g mommmmmmmm DU00D00000 eiee AAA If the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been used before the page accessed last appears 3 When the CONTENTS page is displayed push the MENU knob once and then turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired page number from among USER 1 EDIT to USER 19 EDIT and ASSIGN EDIT Then push the MENU knob Or turn t
26. ESCAPE switch to CANCEL PRST before pushing the MENU knob in step 7 Set the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to CANCEL PRST The message CANCEL DATA OK appears To cancel the previous setting Push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to CANCEL PRST To reset the setting to the initial value Push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to CANCEL PRST once more After the message PRESET DATA OK appears push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to CANCEL PRST again The setting is reset to the initial value The action of the CANCEL PRST function differs for some setting items Some items are only affected by PRST Check the setting procedure for each item for more information To interrupt the settings change operation By setting the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF the menu disappears from the screen By setting the MENU ON OFF switch to ON again the values that were displayed when you interrupted the setting operations will reappear so you can continue making settings T Push the MENU knob Menu Organization and Operation 77 sBues pelrejeq pue shejdsiq nuaw g Jeldey9 HMI sbumes paliejeq pue sfejdsiq nue g Je deyo HAI 78 The mark returns to a mark and the mark returns to a mark The setting is confirmed 8 To continue setting other items on the same page repeat steps 4 to 7 Moving to another page T When the gt mark is placed at a position of items other than the page number turn the MENU
27. For example files from 001 to 005 are replaced Setting the file ID Before the data is saved as a scene file it is useful to set a file ID to identify it The set file ID is saved together with the data On the SCENE FILE page turn the MENU knob to move the mark to F ID O40SCENE FILE TOP OOOGOO0000000000 OOOOOOOOo0000000 HOOOoooo0ooooo0o00 QOOOOOOUO0000000 QOOoooooooo0o0000 OSTANDARD SCENE RECALL EXEC SCENE STORE EXEC F ID 2 Push the MENU knob A character table appears allowing you to select characters you want to enter E END ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPORSTUVW XYZ 0123456789 amp x 1 lt 0 RET INS DEL 3 Follow steps 4 and 5 in 5 2 8 Setting the Shot ID page 89 to enter the file ID Set the file ID before saving the scene file in the Memory Stick or the camcorder memory Otherwise the file ID is not saved with the other data Saving and Loading Scene Files 4 When you finish entering the file ID turn the MENU knob to move the mark to END then push the MENU knob The SCENE FILE page appears again O4OSCENE FILE TOP D1 Hoiagiggdunan 02 Ooooggogougcgoo 03 ABEOVEDEOSOUDo0 ae QOOOOOQ000000000 0000000000000000 OSTANDARD SCENE RECALL EXEC SCENE STOR F EXEC F ID SCENE Follow the procedure from step 3 in 6 2 1 Saving a Scene File page 110 The set file ID is saved together with the data Selecting the
28. From adjusting the black balance and white balance to stopping recording After turning on the power and loading a cassette set the switches and selectors as shown below and begin operation AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 AUTO DISPLAY ON Iris AUTO Zoom AUTO F RUN or R RUN set as needed Shooting T Push the AUTO W B BAL switch to BLK to adjust the black balance For details of black balance adjustment see 4 1 1 Adjusting the Black Balance on page 59 2 Select the CC filter and ND filter to match the lighting conditions and adjust the white balance When the white balance settings are already in memory Set the WHITE BAL switch to A or B When the white balance setting is not in memory and you do not have enough time to adjust the white balance Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST This automatically adjusts the white balance as follows depending on the setting of the FILTER selector A 5600K Recording 37 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey g saydeyp WHI yoeghe q pue Bulpiosey E Ja deyo HAI 38 B 3200K C 4300K D 6300K For details see 4 1 2 Adjusting the White Balance on page 60 3 Aim the camera at the subject and adjust the focus and zoom 4 it necessary set the electronic shutter for an appropriate mode and speed For details see 4 2 Setting the Electronic Shutter on page 62 Sz To start recording press the VTR START button or the VTR
29. IN CH1 or CH2 connector Set the LINE AES EBU MIC switch for the channel to which the audio out cable is attached to LINE Audio equipment AUDIOIN amp CH 1 or CH2 AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 switch corresponding to the channel to which the audio equipment is connected to REAR 7 6 Tripod Mounting You can easily mount and dismount the camcorder on a tripod by using the VCT 14 tripod adaptor not supplied T Attach the tripod adaptor to the tripod Tripod adaptor Camera mount the red button against the lever a second time and move the lever as shown below until the pin returns to the stowed position If the pin remains in the engaged position you will not be able to mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor Stowed position Pin Slide the camcorder forward along the groove in the adaptor until it clicks Lever Red button While pressing the red button against the lever move the lever in the direction indicated by the arrow The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged position even after the camcorder is removed If this happens press Tripod Mounting Japioowey ou dq Bumes z Ja deyo HH Mh 125 Japiooweg y dN Bumes z Ja deyo HAI 126 7 7 Attaching Detaching the Shoulder Strap Attaching the shoulder strap Attach the supplied shoulder strap as shown
30. In this case the bar display O does not appear Selecting the automatic iris window 1 2 Follow steps 1 and 2 in Changing the reference value page 66 to display the AUTO IRIS page Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to IRIS WINDOW IND then push the MENU knob The mark on the left of IRIS WINDOW IND changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob until ON appears then push the MENU knob The mark returns to a mark and the mark returns to a mark The currently selected auto iris window appears on the screen Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment 67 Bulpiocey 104 sumas pue sjuewsnipy Jeldey9 Ih If itis not necessary to display the auto iris window on the viewfinder screen set it to OFF 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to IRIS WINDOW then push the MENU knob The gt mark changes to a mark and the mark changes to a mark 5 Turn the MENU knob until the desired auto iris window appears then push the MENU knob a The shaded parts indicate the area where light detection occurs BulpsooeyY 104 sumas pue sjuewjsnipy se deyo MA 68 Auto iris window The mark returns to a mark and the mark returns to a mark If you select VAR the following items become effective and you can set the window to the desired size Set each item to the desired s
31. Memory Stick compartment Push the eject button after confirming that the ACCESS indicator is not lit The Memory Stick pops out Check that the ACCESS indicator is not lit Eject button Do not remove the Memory Stick while the ACCESS indicator is lit You may lose data or damage the Memory Stick Protecting saved data To prevent accidental erasure of important setup data use the LOCK switch on the Memory Stick Slide the switch right to the write protect position The message MEMORY STICK LOCKED is displayed This ensures that you cannot inadvertently overwrite data on the Memory Stick Cay LOCK Notes on using and storing the Memory Stick e Avoid touching the connector of the Memory Stick or contacting it with a metal object e When attaching a label to the Memory Stick use only the label supplied for the Memory Stick e Do not drop bend or submit the Memory Stick to external shock e Do not disassemble or modify the Memory Stick e Avoid getting liquids on the Memory Stick e Avoid using or storing the Memory Stick in a location subject to extremely high temperature such as the hot inside of a car or the outdoors exposed to a burning sun or a place near a heater direct sunlight high humidity excessive dust When storing and carryi
32. O40GAMMA oO RO BRO lt XOO0CO0OUIZ GAMMA STEP GAMMA MASTER GAMMA R GAMMA G GAMMA B GAMMA OUTPUT SELECT GAMMA SELECT GAM SEL HG a White clip White clip level 100 level 109 Effective for shooting in Hyper Hyper low light scenes for better Gamma 1 Gamma 3 tonal reproductions of low key areas 3 dB Gain can be used for further noise reduction Effective for shooting from Hyper Hyper low light to high contrast Gamma 2 Gamma 4 scenes 3 dB Gain should not be used Hyper Gamma 3 Hyper Gamma 4 109 100 Hyper Gamma 1 Hyper Gamma 2 6 Push the MENU knob 7 Change the white clip level to fit the hyper gamma selected in step 5 Display the KNEE page of the PAINT menu OGOKNEE Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to WHITE CLIP LEVEL then push the MENU knob O6OKNEE Turn the MENU knob until the corresponding white clip level appears then push the MENU knob You cannot change the settings related to KNEE functions when you use the hyper gamma function 8 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch When you select STD in step 3 The following gamma tables are available Setting Gamma curve 1 Equivalent to SD ENG camcorder 2 Equivalent to SMPT 240M 3 Equivalent to ITU 709 4 Equivalent to GAIN50 5 3 10 Using the USER Gamma You can create the desired gamma table using a personal
33. OFF switch HA ON SEL oF STATUS OFF O MENU ON OFF switch PO eHO CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch Switch cover Memory Stick compartment Memory Stick Eject button Open the cover of the Memory Stick compartment by pressing the MEMORY STICK OPEN button and insert the Memory Stick To remove press the eject button During data writing loading to from the Memory Stick the ACCESS indicator lights or flashes For details see 6 1 1 Handling the Memory Stick on page 106 MENU knob Changes the page selection or a setting within the menu Push If you push this knob when the arrow is placed at the page title on the menu the arrow changes to a question mark and you can change the page by turning this knob When the arrow mark is placed at a position other than the page title you can change the setting of the current item by pushing and turning this knob Turn Turn this knob to change the page or change item settings STATUS ON SEL OFF menu display on page selection display off switch To enable this switch set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Closing the switch cover automatically sets the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF ON SEL Each time this switch is pushed upward a window to confirm the menu settings and status of the camcorder appears on the viewfinder screen The window consists of three pages which are switched each t
34. REC TIME O30FUNCTIONI ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ATW ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt 3 OFF TURBO SW TURBO FRONT MIC SELECT STREO F NDE DF D END SEARCH OFF CACHE INTVAL REC CACHE CACHE REC TIME OSEC 9 Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of CACHE REC TIME changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 1 Otun the MENU knob until the desired Picture Cache time appears As you turn the MENU knob the Picture Cache time changes in the following sequence OSEC gt 1SEC gt 2SEC gt 3SEC gt 4SEC gt 5SEC gt 6SEC 7SEC 1 7 sec for 59 94i 29 97PsF format 8 sec for 50i 25PsF 24PsF 23 98PsF format 1 1 Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of CACHE REC TIME changes to a mark and the mark changes to a mark 12 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF The menu disappears and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the viewfinder screen Settings made in Picture Cache mode are maintained until changed You can turn Picture Cache mode on and off by assigning the Picture Cache ON OFF function to one of the assignable switches ASSIGN 1 2 and TURBO GAIN For detailed information on the assignable switches see 5 3 5 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches on page 96 Note When recording in Picture Cache mode VITC is not recorded when the F RUN SET R RU
35. Set the AUDIO IN CH 3 and CH 4 switches to F Set AUDIO SELECT CH3 and AUDIO SELECT CH4 to AUTO on the AUDIO 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu Set the CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch to CH 3 4 Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector at a suitable sound source Check that the level indications for both channels 3 and 4 correspond to the sound level Be sure to reset the CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch to CH 1 2 after checking the channels 3 and 4 3 Testing the manual audio level S adjusting functions Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 and CH 2 switches to FRONT Set the AUDIO SELECT CH 1 and CH 2 switches to MANUAL Set the CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch to CH 1 2 Turn the MIC LEVEL control Check that the channel 1 and 2 audio level meter in the display panel increases segments as you turn the control counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camcorder Set the AUDIO IN CH 3 and CH 4 switches to F Set AUDIO SELECT CH3 and AUDIO SELECT CH4 to MANU on the AUDIO 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu Set the CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch to CH 3 4 Check that the channel 3 and 4 audio level meters on the display show respective increases segments as you increase the values of LVL CONROL CH3 and LVL CONTROL CH4 on the AUDIO 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu Be sure to reset the CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch to CH 1 2 after checking the channels 3 and 4 4 Testing the earphone and speaker 1 2 Turn the MONITOR volume control and check
36. The current settings appear on the right side of each item QO1OUSER FILE SUSER FILE LOAD D EXEC USER FILE SAVE EXEC F 10 ooooogoo000000000 USER PRESET EXEC 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to USER PRESET then push the MENU knob The message PRESET OK YES NO appears Q1OUSER FILE PRESET OK USER FILE LOAD USER FILE SAVE F 1D OO00000000000000 D EXEC USER PRESET 5 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to YES then push the MENU knob The settings for all items in the USER menu are reset to the standard settings 6 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Standard Settings sBules pelrejeq pue skejdsiq nua g Jeldeyo9 HHI 105 eyeq Buijes asn Bulpeo pue Bulaeg g Jaydeyo HAI 106 Saving and Loading User Setting Data 6 1 Saving and Loading User Files The camcorder is equipped with a Memory Stick drive which enables you to save user files scene files lens files reference files and ALL files You can load these files from the Memory Stick for immediate recall of a particular setting configuration When a menu page is displayed you can set up the camcorder so that inserting a Memory Stick automatically jumps to the appropriate file related menu page For details about scene files see 6 2 Saving and Loading Scene Files on page 110 For details of the function for j
37. both enabled V V DTL only enabled P10 SD DETAIL SD DETAIL OFF ON ON Turns the detail function on or off SD DETAIL LEVEL 99 to 99 Sets the general level of the detail signal SD CRISPENING 0 to 15 Sets the crispening level SD DTL WHT LIMIT 99 to 99 Sets the detail white limiter SD DTL BLK LIMIT 99 to 99 0 Sets the detail black limiter SD LEVEL DEPEND OFF ON ON Turns the level depend function on or off SD LV DEPEND LVL 8to 3 Sets the level depend level SD DTL FREQ 2 to 1 Sets the frequency of the H detail signal SD DTL H V RATIO 3 to 4 Sets the V detail SD CROSS COLOR 8 to 7 Sets the cross color suppression level P11 SKIN DETAIL SKIN DETAIL ALL OFF ON OFF Turns on all of 1 2 and 3 of the color detail function SKIN DETECT Moves to color EXEC Executes the color detail function detection page SKIN AREA IND OFF ON OFF Turns the zebra indication on off in the area of the currently selected type of the color detail function SKIN DTL SELECT 1 2 3 1 Selects the channels to be displayed on the menu SKIN DETAIL OFF ON ON Turns the color detail function on off for the gt selected channels 3 SKIN DETAIL LVL 99 to 99 Sets the level of the color detail signal b SKIN DTL SAT 99 to 99 Adjusts the saturation level of the hue S possessed by the color detail function SKIN DTL HUE 0 to 359 0 Adjusts the center phase of the hue possessed by the color detail function SKIN DTL WIDTH 0 to 359 4
38. computer on which software CvpFileEditor has been installed and load this table into your camcorder via a Memory Stick When a user gamma table is selected either gamma LEVEL or ON OFF or knee POINT SLOPE ON OFF or DCC or both may become disabled This is because the gamma and knee are compulsorily fixed when creating the gamma curve 1 CvpFileEditor is a trademark of Sony Corporation 1 Follow steps 1 2 and 3 in 5 3 3 Setting the Color Temperature Manually on page 95 to display the GAMMA page of the PAINT menu and then push the MENU knob 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to GAMMA SELECT then push the MENU knob The mark on the left of GAMMA SELECT changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark ot Turn the MENU knob until USER appears then push the MENU knob As you turn the MENU knob the type of the gamma table changes in the following sequence STD HG gt USER 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to GAM SEL USER then push the MENU knob 5 Select the desired USER GAMMA table You must load gamma table data from a Memory Stick beforehand If gamma table data is not loaded into the camcorder data from STANDARD is substituted For detailed information on how to create and load data refer to the Maintenance Manual Adjustments and Settings from Menus sBules pelrejeq pue skejdsiq nua S 134dey9 HMI 103 sbumes palle
39. knob to move the mark to UMID SET then push the MENU knob If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the UMID SET page appears then push the MENU knob The current setting appears on the right side of each item UMID SET page 20OUMID SET EX OWNERSHIP REC COUNTRY CODE ORGANIZATION USER CODE INSTANCE NO TIME ZONE 00 MACHINE 000000000000 Item Contents EX OWNERSHIP Specifies whether to record the REC user data COUNTRY CODE Sets the country code ORGANIZATION Sets the organization code USER CODE Sets the user code INSTANCE NO Specifies how to generate the instance number TIME ZONE Sets the time difference from UTC MACHINE Displays the machine specific number 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item you want to set then push the MENU knob The mark to the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark to the left of the setting changes to a mark 5 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting of the selected item or to display the desired value then push the MENU knob The mark returns to a mark and the mark returns to a mark 6 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Additional information on the UMID SET menu items EX OWNERSHIP REC Specify whether to record the user data ON The user data COUNTRY CODE ORGANIZATION and USER CODE are recorded on the tape OFF The user da
40. 162 Reference file 113 REMOTE connector 25 RESET button 30 RE TAKE function 50 Return video signal 92 REW button and indicator 26 ROM VERSION 164 S SATURATION 151 SCENE FILE 151 161 Scene file 110 loading 112 saving 110 SCENE FILE page 110 SD DETAIL 149 SET STATUS 145 SET STATUS page 92 SHIFT button 30 SHOT DISP 145 SHOT DISP page 89 SHOT ID 145 Shot ID 89 SHOT ID page 89 SHOT MARKER 157 Shot marks 39 Shoulder pad 18 126 Shoulder strap 126 Shoulder strap posts 18 SHT ENABLE 146 SHT ENABLE page 65 SHUTTER selector 24 Single Trigger mode 47 SKIN DETAIL 149 SLS slow speed shutter mode 62 Stand by off Timer 58 Status Confirmation Windows 91 STATUS ON SEL OFF switch 27 STOP button 26 Supplied accessories 137 Supplied microphone 121 SW STATUS 147 System configuration 14 T TALLY indicator 22 31 34 TALLY switch 23 31 Tape status indicator 32 TC IN connector 29 TC OUT connector 29 TELE 163 TELE FILE 163 TELE FILE page 55 Tele File 53 Tele File mark 54 TEST OUT 145 TEST OUT connector 25 Time code display 33 Time code setting 72 Time code synchronization 73 TIME DATE 164 TIME DATE page 98 TIMECODE 156 TOP menu 75 Tripod 125 Tripod adaptor 125 Tripod mount 18 TURBO GAIN button 25 TURBO SW window 97 Cc HF portable tuners 123 MID SET 146 MID SET page 101 ser bits 73 SER FILE 161 ser File 107 SER FILE page 104 SER FILE2 161 SER GAMMA 162 COGG GGG G USER Gam
41. 28 Cassette loading 35 unloading 36 CC filter 60 CCD image sensors 136 CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch 19 Cleaning video heads 134 viewfinder 134 Color temperature 95 Condensation 130 Continues recording 38 Continuous Trigger mode 47 CONTRAST control 22 CUE IN switch 21 D DATA DISPLAY switch 30 Date Time of the Internal Clock 98 DC IN connector 17 DC OUT 12 V connector 21 DCC ADJUST 157 DETAIL 1 149 DETAIL2 149 DEV STATUS 164 DIAGNOSIS menu 76 Diopter adjustment 118 Diopter adjustment ring 23 Display mode 85 Display panel 32 DISPLAY switch 30 DISPLAY ASPECT switch 31 Drop frame mode 72 E EARPHONE jacks 19 ECS Extended Clear Scan mode 62 EJECT button 26 Eject button 27 End Search function 51 Error messages 136 EVS Enhanced Vertical definition System mode 63 External microphone 122 Eyepiece 119 disassembling 134 F F FWD button and indicator 26 FILE menu 76 FILTER selector 23 Flange focal length 120 Fog proof filter 134 FORMAT 159 Freeze frame mode 57 F RUN SET R RUN switch 30 FUNCTION 1 141 FUNCTION 1 page 96 FUNCTION 2 142 FUNCTION 3 159 FUNCTION window 91 G Gain 93 GAIN selector 24 GAIN SW 144 GAIN SW page 93 GAMMA 148 GAMMA page 102 GENLOCK 159 GENLOCK IN connector 29 GENLOCK page 92 Good shot marks 39 H HD SDI OUT connector 25 HKDW 702 52 HKDW 703 43 HKDW 902R 52 HKDW 905R 64 HOLD button 30 HOURS METER 164 Hyper Gamma 102 Interval Rec Function 43 Index
42. 902R is installed the SD output signal is not effective for 24PsF As a result this menu operation is disabled in such a case 5 When one of 50i 24PsF 25PsF or 23 98PsF is selected this item is not displayed Menu List sexipueddy 151 MAINTENANCE Menu The following table lists and describes the items in the MAINTENANCE menu When the setting range in the Settings column is surrounded by parentheses the setup value is a relative value The setting range shown on the menu screen may differ from what is shown in the manual No Page Item Settings Default Description M01 WHITE SHADING CH SEL R G B TEST TEST Selects the channel adjusted by shading If SHADING TEST is selected the setting is the same as the setting of OUTPUT SELECT OUTPUT SELECT Y R G B Y Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector the input signal to the viewfinder and the output signal from the VBS SDI OUT R G B WHT H SAW 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the H Saw white shading compensation R G B WHT H PARA 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the H Parabola white shading compensation R G B WHT V SAW 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the V Saw white shading compensation R G B WHT V PARA 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the V Parabola white shading compensation WHITE SAW PARA_ OFF ON ON Turns white shading Saw and Parabola compensation on and off M02 BLACK SHADING CH SEL R G
43. B TEST R Selects the channel adjusted by shading If SHADING TEST is selected the setting is the same as the setting of OUTPUT SELECT OUTPUT SELECT Y R G B Y Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector the input signal to the viewfinder and the output signal from the VBS SDI OUT R G B BLK H SAW 99 to 99 0 For H Saw black shading compensation R G B BLK H PARA 99 to 99 0 For H Parabola black shading compensation R G B BLK V SAW _ 99 to 99 0 For V Saw black shading compensation R G B BLK V PARA 99 to 99 0 For V Parabola black shading compensation BLACK SAW PARA OFF ON ON Turns black shading Saw and Parabola compensation on and off MASTER BLACK 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the master black level MASTER 3 0 3 6 9 1 2 1 8 0 dB Temporarily adjusts the master gain value GAIN TMP 24 30 36 42 dB ne 3 2 152 Menu List No Page Item Settings Default Description Mo3 LEVEL ADJ Y LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the chrominance level of the output signal to the TEST OUT connector and to the viewfinder SYNC LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the SYNC level of the output signal to the TEST OUT connector and to the viewfinder Pr LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the Pr level of the output signal to the TEST OUT connector and to the viewfinder Pb LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the Pb level of the output signal to the TEST OUT connector and to the viewfinder OUTPUT
44. Bulpeo pue Bulaeg 9 Jaydeyo HAI 108 P00 USER SAVE DISPLAY 001 NEW 002 NEW 003 NEW 004 NEW 005 NEW When a appears on the left of P00 at the top left of the page you can change the page Up to 20 pages from POO to P19 can be used to save user files in the Memory Stick Each page can hold up to 5 files 4 Turn the MENU knob until the page that contains the desired file number appears then push the MENU knob POO USER SAVE DISPLAY 001 NEW 005 NEW 5 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired file number then push the MENU knob POO USER SAVE DISPLAY MODE gt 001 NEW FILE 002 NEW When a file number is shown as NEW FILE this means that the file is empty When data is stored in a file number the file name appears IL 003 NEW FIL 004 NEW FIL 005 NEW FIL The ACCESS indicator lights When the saving is completed the message COMPLETE appears and the ACCESS indicator goes off If you select a file number where data has already been saved The message OVER WRITE OK YES NO appears In this case the mark appears on the left of NO which is flashing e To stop overwriting push the MENU knob e To overwrite move the mark to YES then push the MENU knob You can select the information displayed on each USER SAVE or USER LOAD page by changing the DISPLAY MODE setting For details see Selecting the display content
45. CONTENTS page of the MAINTENANCE menu appears If the menu has been used before the page accessed last appears If the CONTENTS page is displayed push the MENU knob once then turn the MENU knob to move the mark to GENLOCK then push the MENU knob again to display the GENLOCK page If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the GENLOCK page appears then push the MENU knob to select the page The current setting of each item appears on the right of the item 16OGENLOCK GENLOCK 0 ON RETURN VIDEO OFF 0 0 GL H PHASE COASE GL H PHASE FINE Carry out setting operations as follows Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to GENLOCK then push the MENU knob The mark on the left of GENLOCK changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the GENLOCK setting changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob until OFF appears then push the MENU knob The mark returns to a mark and the mark returns to a mark and the setting is executed Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to RETURN VIDEO then push the MENU knob The mark changes to a mark and the mark changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob until ON appears then push the MENU knob The mark returns to a mark and the mark returns to a mark and the setting is executed To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Seeing the image of the return video signal on the view
46. Control Unit which makes it possible to control the VTR and camera remotely Shooting and Recording Playback Functions 25 S 01 U0Q puke seq JO suonouny pue suoneoogq zg sa deu9 A S 01 U09 pUe seq JO suonouny pue suoneooq z saldeup 26 VTR START button VTR SAVE STBY switch EJECT button amp REW button and indicator F FWD button and indicator PLAY button and indicator amp STOP button Shooting and recording playback functions 4 VTR START button Press this button to start recording Press it again to stop recording The effect is exactly the same as that of the VTR button on the lens When the REC SWITCH function is assigned to the ASSIGN 1 switch push button you can use the switch as the VTR START button For details see 5 3 5 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches on page 96 VTR SAVE STBY standby switch Controls the VTR power mode during pauses in recording SAVE Power saving mode When you press the VTR START button there is a short delay before recording starts but power consumption in this mode is less than in standby mode As a result battery life is extended When the switch is set to SAVE the VTR SAVE indicator in the viewfinder lights STBY Standby mode Recording starts as soon as you press the VTR START button e Avoid allowing the camcorder to remain in STBY standby mode for a long time e Even if the switch is set
47. FRONT or F Set the front microphone selection function to MONO Audio Input System Jepioowey eu dn Bumes z seydeyo HH Mh 121 Japiooweg ey dN Bumes z Ja deyo HAI 122 When an optional HDVF C30W HD Electronic Viewfinder is used The HDVF C30W is not equipped with a microphone holder Attach an optional CAC 12 Microphone Holder to the camcorder first then attach the supplied microphone For detailed information on how to attach the CAC 12 follow the procedure of steps 2 3 and 4 described in Using an external microphone attached to the camcorder in 7 5 2 Using an External Microphone on page 122 Note When an HDVF C30W is connected NG is displayed for EEPROM STATUS on the DEV STATUS page page 164 of the DIAGNOSIS menu However this is not a malfunction 7 5 2 Using an External Microphone You can connect up to two external microphones using the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors Set the LINE AES EBU MIC switch to MIC When using a condenser microphone that requires external power phantom power set the 48 V OFF switch to 48 V If the microphone being used does not require external power dynamic microphone set the 48 V OFF switch to OFF Using a detached external microphone LINE AES EBU MIC switch Set this switch to MIC 48V OFF switch Set this switch to 48V when using an external power supply type microphone Set to OFF when using an internal power supply ty
48. GAIN MID GAIN HIGH GAIN TURBO TURBO SW IND Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to the desired item e Turning the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera moves the mark up continuously e Turning the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camera moves the mark down continuously Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark The menu display changes to the setting screen where you can change the settings O7OGAIN SW GAIN LOW GAIN MID GAIN HIGH GAIN TURBO TURBO SW IND 6 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting To increase a setting value Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera To decrease a setting value Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camera When you turn the MENU knob the setting increases or decreases one step at a time If you turn the knob quickly the numeric value changes rapidly If you turn it slowly you can make minor adjustments To toggle a setting on or off Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise Each turning operation of the knob toggles the ON and OFF settings To cancel the setting to reset the setting to the initial setting You can cancel the setting and reset it to its initial value one set at the factory or a preset value by pushing the CANCEL PRST
49. Identifier is a unique identifier for audio visual material defined by the SMPTE330M 2003 standard The UMID may be used either as the 32 byte Basic UMID or as the Extended UMID which includes an additional 32 bytes of Source Pack to make a total 64 bytes For details refer to SMPTE 330M Extended UMID 64 bytes Basic UMID 32 bytes Source Pack 32 bytes lt 4 gt gt Universal label L Inst No Material Number Time Date Spatial Countr Or User E Co ordinates y g 12 bytes 1 3 bytes 16 bytes 8 bytes 12 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes A globally unique ID is automatically recorded at every shooting The Extended UMID is metadata that provides additional information such as location time date company and so on The UMID is applied as follows Instance No Material No ID generated when shooting Same as the above Source Pack Shooting information when where and who Same as the above Original material 00 00 00 Copied material generation number 1 byte random number 2 bytes t Distinguishing between original material and copied material material Material source ID detecting Metadata pack that identifies the source of material by defining the when where and who of the material unit with which it is associated Using the Extended UMID You have to enter a country code organization code and user code
50. Lens File The LENS FILE page of the USER menu allows you to change the lens file according to the lens in use 1 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The menu page accessed last appears on the viewfinder screen Turn the MENU knob until the LENS FILE page appears then push the MENU knob to select the page The LENS FILE page shows the file name of the lens file currently selected 14OLENS FILE LENS FILE SELECT F 1D OOOOO00000000 lt LENS INFORMATION OOOOOOOOO000o OOOO000000000 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to LENS FILE SELECT then push the MENU knob The mark changes to a mark and the mark changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob until the lens file No in use appears then push the MENU knob The mark returns to a mark and the mark returns to a mark To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Adjustments and Settings from Menus 99 sBules pelrejeq pue shejdsiq nuaw S 13 dey9 A shumes pajleyeq pue s ejds q nue g Ja deyo HAI 100 5 3 8 Using UMID Data To perform operations from interviewing to editing effectively and to detect audio visual materials easily when reusing them metadata that provides additional information is recorded along with audio visual data on a tape As one of application of metadata the UMID Unique Material Identifier is internationally standardized What is a UMID The UMID Unique Material
51. MULTI AXIS to the axis corresponding to the detected color MULTI MTX PRESET EXEC Presets settings for 16 axes of MTX MULTI HUE and MTX MULTI SAT respectively MTX MULTI AXIS B B MG MG B Selects the axis for which the multi matrix MG R R YL correction function can be changed YL YL G G G CY CY B MTX MULTI HUE 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the color phase affected by the multi matrix correction function in every sixteen axis mode MTX MULTI SAT 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the saturation level affected by the multi matrix correction function in every sixteen axis mode P14 V MODULATION V MOD OFF ON ON Turns the V modulation function on off MASTER VMOD 99 to 99 0 Turns the master V modulation function on off R VMOD 99 to 99 0 Turns the R V modulation function on off G VMOD 99 to 99 0 Turns the G V modulation function on off B VMOD 99 to 99 0 Turns the B V modulation function on off OUTPUT SELECT Y R G B Y Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector the input signal to the viewfinder and the output signal from the VBS SDI OUT Menu List No Page Item Settings Default Description SAT LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Sets the saturation level LOW KEY SAT OFF ON OFF Turns the low key saturation function on off L KEY SAT LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Sets the saturation level of the low luminance part L KEY SAT RANGE LOW
52. Press the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens At the instant the recording starts the time code of the recording start is recorded on the memory label 3 4 2 Recording a Tele File Mark OK NG KP onto the Memory Label A Tele File mark that is a rating of the images recorded just before they are recorded can be recorded onto the memory label with the recording start time code every time the unit enters the recording pause mode Recording the Recording Start Time Code onto the Memory Label Tele File 53 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey g 13 deyo ii yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey E Ja deyo WAI 54 The following three Tele File marks are available e OK Place this mark when you decide the recorded images are good e NG Place this mark when you decide the recorded images are not good e KP Place this mark when it is hard to decide whether or not the recorded images are good just after recording or when you want to insert a mark between multiple shots Recorded Tele File marks are read by studio use devices logging software and so on which support the Tele File function These marks are very helpful for improving the efficiency of tape editing Before recording a Tele File mark To use this function the TELE FILE MARK function should be assigned to the ASSIGN 1 switch or TURBO GAIN button For details see 5 3 5 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches on page 96 Recording Tele File marks S
53. S2 SIDE 2 Selects any of these controls to adjust the audio level of the equipment that is connected to the wireless microphone and whatever is connected to the AUDIO IN CH2 connector on the rear panel SIDE 2 Adjust it with the LEVEL control right side on the side panel FRONT Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control on the front panel F S2 It can be adjusted using either the LEVEL control right side or the MIC LEVEL control The two controls are linked to each other AUDIO SELECT CH3 AUTO MANU AUTO Selects either automatic operation or manual operation to adjust the audio recording level of audio channel 3 AUDIO SELECT CH4 AUTO MANU AUTO Selects either automatic operation or manual operation to adjust the audio recording level of audio channel 4 LVL CONTROL CH3 0 to 100 70 Adjusts the audio recording level of audio channel 3 in manual operation mode LVL CONTROL CH4 0 to 100 70 Adjusts the audio recording level of audio channel 4 in manual operation mode Menu List sexipueddy 155 sexipueddy 156 No Page M09 TIMECODE Item TC OUT Settings AUTO GENE Default AUTO Description Selects the time code signal output AUTO Outputs the time code generator output during recording and outputs the time code reader output during playback GENE Outputs the time code generator output during recording and playback
54. SHUTTER selector to ON Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST Set the 5600K mode to ON on the FUNCTION 2 page Use the lens extender Set the inner FILTER ND filter selector to anything but 1 Set the outer FILTER CC filter selector to anything but B Set the reference value of the auto iris adjustment to a value other than the standard value Set the frame frequency to one other than 23 98PsF When conditions to make the indicator light were changed on the l LED page indicator lighting operations follow the settings on the LED page Move the SHUTTER selector from ON to SEL repeatedly and check that the shutter setting changes on the viewfinder screen 7 8 Pointing the camera at a suitable subject focus the camera and check the picture on the viewfinder screen Set both of the AUDIO IN switches to FRONT and check that when sound is input to a microphone connected to the MIC IN connector on the front of the camcorder the audio level indicators appear on the viewfinder screen Check that setting the ZEBRA switch to ON and OFF makes the zebra pattern appear and disappear on the viewfinder screen The results of checking in steps 3 to 9 may not be as expected depending on the settings relating to the viewfinder display function In this case set the desired items on the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the USER menu For details see 5 2 2 Selecting Display Items on page 84 Testin
55. Set the country code referring to the ISO 3166 table and set the organization code and user code independently For details see UMID menu setup on page 101 Adjustments and Settings from Menus Functions of UMID data The UMID data enables the following e Addition of a globally unique ID to every shot of audio visual material The unique ID is used to detect the material source and to link it with the original source material e Distinguishing between original material and copied material 00 is added to the Instance Number for original material e Recording based on the UTC The UTC is used when recording the UMID This enables uniform control of source material recorded all over the world based on the universal time code e Calculating the date difference among source materials The source material is recorded based on the MJD Modified Julian Date which enables easy calculation of date difference among source materials UMID menu setup The UMID SET page of the OPERATION menu allows you to make settings for UMID data 1 Holding down the MENU knob set the MENU ON OFF switch from OFF to ON The TOP menu appears 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to OPERATION then push the MENU knob If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page appears If the menu has been used before the page accessed last appears 3 If the CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU
56. System 29 S 01 U0Q pUe seq JO suonouny pue suoneoogq zg 13 deyo N S 01 U09 pUe seq JO suonouny pue suopeooq z saldeup 30 LIGHT WARNING RESET button DISPLAY switch ADVANCE button SHIFT button PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch F RUN SET R RUN switch DATA DISPLAY switch ANCE SHIET PRESET ARUN Time code functions 2 HOLD display hold button Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data displayed in the counter display section The time code generator continues running Pressing this button again releases the hold You can use this button for example to determine the exact time of a particular shot When the HOLD button is activated the time data is displayed in the following format Coco co 00 For details of the counter display see 2 8 Warnings and Indications on the Display Panel on page 32 O RESET button Pressing this button resets the time data displayed on the counter display section to 00 00 00 00 or the user bit data to 00000000 DISPLAY LCD display switch CTL Displays control signal TC Displays time code DATA Displays the item selected by the DATA DISPLAY switch For details see Time code display on page 33 ADVANCE button For setting the time code user bi
57. a mark and the mark returns to a mark 20 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF The menu display disappears from the viewfinder screen and the message AUTO INTERVAL M S indicating Auto Interval Rec mode appears along the bottom of the viewfinder M S indicates the shooting interval For example when TAKE TOTAL TIME is set to 1H and REC TIME is set to 30 SEC the message AUTO INTERVAL 00M04S appears The shooting interval is 4 seconds The display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the viewfinder The settings for Auto Interval Rec mode are maintained until changed However if you switch off the camcorder power Auto Interval Rec mode is cleared except for the TAKE TOTAL TIME REC TIME and PRE LIGHTING settings To use the Auto Interval Rec function again after switching on the power perform steps 1 to 6 Recording in Auto Interval Rec mode When you use blank cassettes such as brand new cassettes be sure to record color bars for more than 2 seconds at the beginning of a cassette After performing the basic procedures for shooting and recording following the instructions in 3 2 1 Recording 45 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey g saydeyo HH Mh yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey E Ja deyo HAI 46 Basic Procedures page 37 secure the camcorder so that it will not move 2 Press the VTR START button on the camcorder or the VTR button on the lens
58. below Shoulder strap post Pull up the strap to lock Clip the fitting Removing the shoulder strap Press here and pull in the direction shown by the arrow to release 7 8 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position You can shift the shoulder pad from its center position factory setting backward by up to 10 mm 3 8 inch or forward by up to 25 mm 1 inch This adjustment helps you get the best balance for shooting with the camcorder on your shoulder 1 3 SS Bottom 2 Shoulder pad T Raise the lever in the center of the shoulder pad to unlock the shoulder pad 2 Slide the shoulder pad backward or forward until it is in the most convenient position 3 Bring down the lever to lock the shoulder pad in the selected position Attaching Detaching the Shoulder Strap Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position 7 9 Attaching the Rain Cover Not Supplied Attach the rain cover part number 3 191 064 02 as illustrated below You can insert and remove cassette tapes operate various switches and controls and mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor with the rain cover attached When a shoulder belt is not used cover the holes on the rain cover with caps When you use a shoulder strap use these holes For details see the following diagram Remove the cap and then pass the shoulder strap post clearly through this hole on the rain c
59. button on the lens If the recording start stop function is assigned to the ASSIGN 1 switch this switch functions as VTR START button For details see 5 3 5 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches on page 96 During recording the REC indicator lights in the viewfinder Perform zooming and focus control if necessary 6 To stop recording press the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens again The REC indicator in the viewfinder goes off Cassette control buttons During recording the cassette control buttons EJECT REW F FWD PLAY STOP have no effect When crash recording without doing continuous recording on a recorded tape or when recording with the RE TAKE function the timecode recorded previously may be displayed for a few seconds when playing back the first part of the cut 3 2 2 Continuous Recording If the camcorder is in the recording pause mode simply pressing the VTR START button on the camcorder or the VTR button on the lens continues recording exactly from the next frame In other cases you first need to position the tape at an appropriate point Recording When the camcorder is in Recording Pause mode Pressing the VTR START button on the camcorder or the VTR button on the lens continues recording at exactly the next frame However the time taken before recording starts depends on the setting of the VTR SAVE STBY switch e Ifthe VTR SAVE STBY switch is in the SAVE positio
60. capacity is reduced further the LOW indication flashes 1 When the DISP BATT REMAIN item is set to AUTO the remaining capacity of the battery is displayed all the time When VOLT is selected or even when AUTO is selected if the remaining battery capacity cannot be detected is used the battery voltage is displayed 2 This value can be set to either 10 or 20 on the FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu indicator This flashes when the color bars are displayed and is recorded together with the color bars Setting change and adjustment progress message display area For details see 5 2 3 Display Modes and Setting Change Confirmation Adjustment Progress Messages on page 85 Operation error message display area For details see Operation error messages on page 136 Iris setting auto iris override This indicates the f stop iris setting of the lens Also the auto iris override is displayed using bars which appear in the upper and lower parts of the screen to the left of the F number respectively For details see 4 3 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment on page 66 O Remaining tape This indicator indicates the remaining tape recording time in minutes of the VTR Examples of remaining tape recording time indication Indication Remaining tape recording time F 30 Full to 30 minutes 30 25 30 to 25 minutes 25 20 25 to 20 minut
61. display contents You can select the items of file information to be displayed on the SCENE STORE pages P01 to P20 or the SCENE RECALL pages P01 to P20 used for saving data to or loading data from a Memory Stick For details see Selecting the display contents on page 109 6 2 2 Loading a Scene File 1 In the TOP menu select the FILE menu 2 Tur the MENU knob until the SCENE FILE page appears then push the MENU knob to select the page Alternatively on the CONTENTS page select SCENE FILE then push the MENU knob to display the SCENE FILE page 3 Load a scene file To load a scene file stored in the camcorder Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired file number then push the MENU knob The O which is displayed on the left of the file number changes to W The camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene file O4OSCENE FILE 01 SCENE 25 E2 SCENE 26 D3 SCENE 27 04 SCENE 28 OS NO FILE OSTANDARD SCENE RECALL SCENE STORE ID SCENE21 To cancel the selected scene file Move the mark to W then push the MENU knob W changes to O The camcorder returns to the settings before selecting this scene file To load a scene file saved in the Memory Stick Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to SCENE RECALL then push the MENU knob The SCENE RECALL page appears P00 SCENE RECALL DISPLAY MODE MEM lt 1 gt NEW FILE MEM lt 5 gt NO FILE Turn t
62. function you need to set the total time for shooting TAKE TOTAL TIME and the length of time for recording on the tape REC TIME The time required for shooting is the time required to capture the very slowly moving subject and the camcorder must be arranged so that during this time the subject is always in the frame The tape recording time indicates the running time of the completed recording The camcorder calculates the time lapse interval from these two times Recording Total time for shooting TAKE TOTAL TIME ee _ Shooting interval a Se Time for recording on the tape REC TIME Notes on Auto Interval Rec operation Time code In Auto Interval Rec mode the internal time code generator runs in R RUN mode regardless of how the F RUN SET R RUN switch is set Time code set in the menu is saved in the user bits Audio Audio signals are not recorded in Auto Interval Rec mode Cassette control buttons While recording in Auto Interval Rec mode you cannot use the cassette control buttons EJECT REW F FWD PLAY and STOP To use these buttons stop recording by pressing the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens Menu operation While recording in Auto Interval Rec mode you cannot change the settings of CACHE INTVAL REC TAKE TOTAL TIME and REC TIME To change the settings stop recording by pressing the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens When the camcorder power is switch
63. gt mark to the item you want to set then push the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob to change the setting then push the MENU knob To continue setting other items repeat steps and op You can change the criteria for whether the indicator lights or does not light on the LED STD page To change the criteria go to step 5 If you don t want to change the criteria go to step 8 Move the mark to the page number then push the MENU knob Or when the gt mark is located at the left of the item push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch down to ESCAPE Turn the MENU knob until the LED STD page appears then push the MENU knob 07 LED STD YNNNYNYN NN NN YN NN lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Item Description GAIN GAIN switch position L M H or 0 dB SHUTTER Shutter mode OFF ECS SLS 1 33 WHITE BAL White balance automatic adjustment memory P PRST A B PA PB or AB CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch Item Description 5600K 5600K mode ON or OFF ATW ATW ON or OFF EXTENDER Extender ON or OFF FILTER ND ND Types of the ND filter 1 2 3 or 4 FILTER CC CC Types of the CC filter A B C or D OVERRIDE ON or OFF when the reference v
64. horizontal position compensation of lens file center marker LENS CENTER V 270 to 269 0 For the vertical position compensation of lens file center marker OUTPUT SELECT Y R G B Y Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector the input signal to the viewfinder and the output signal from the VBS SDI ouT LENS R FLARE 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the lens file flare R LENS G FLARE 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the lens file flare G LENS B FLARE 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the lens file flare B LENS W R OFST 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the white R compensation value for the lens file LENS W B OFST 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the white B compensation value for the lens file Menu List No Page Item Settings Default Description F09 LENS FILE 3 SHADING CH SEL R G B TEST R Selects the channel adjusted by shading If TEST is selected the setting is the same as the setting of OUTPUT SELECT OUTPUT SELECT Y R G B Y Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector the input signal to the viewfinder and the output signal from the VBS SDI OUT LENS R G B H SAW 99 to 99 0 For the H Saw white shading compensation for the lens file LENS R G B H PARA 99 to 99 0 For the H Parabola white shading compensation for the lens file LENS R G B V SAW 99 to 99 0 For the V Saw white shading compensation for the lens file LENS R G B V PARA 99 to 99 0 For the V Parabola white shading
65. made one or an external power connected to the DC IN connector is used Sets the voltage level at which the battery ends and the camcorder stops operation just before the battery ends Menu List sexipueddy 153 sexipueddy 154 No Page Item Settings Default Description Mo6 AUDIO 1 AUDIO OUT F R CUE EE CUE Selects the audio output signal during FF REW CUE cue audio signal EE Input signal REC AUDIO OUT EE SAVE EE Selects the audio output signal during recording EE Input signal SAVE Not output CAMERA ENABL DSABL ENABL When a camera adaptor is connected selects ADAPTER whether or not to enable input of audio channels 3 and 4 from the camera adaptor ENABL Camera adaptor can be used DSABL Camera adaptor cannot be used AUDIO CH3 4 CH1 2 SW SW Selects the sources to be recorded on MODE channels 3 and 4 CH1 2 Same sources as channels 1 and 2 SW Signals selected by the AUDIO IN CH 3 CH 4 switches FRONT MIC REF 60 dB 50 dB 40 50 dB Sets the reference level of the front dB microphone REAR MIC REF 60 dB 50 dB 40 60 dB Sets the reference level when the AUDIO IN dB CH1 or CH2 connector is set to MIC REAR MIC 48V ENABL DSABL ENABL Selects whether external power is supplied to the external microphone when AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector is set to MIC M07 AUDIO 2 AU REC EMPHASIS OFF ON OFF Turns the emphasis funct
66. minutes divided by 30 gives 2 minutes The time setting displayed when you turn the MENU knob changes within the available setting times Be sure to set REC TIME only after setting TAKE TOTAL TIME 15 Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of REC TIME returns toa gt mark and the mark returns to a mark 1 6 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to PRE LIGHTING O30FUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt TURBO SW TURBO FRONT MIC SELECT STREO NDE DF END SEARCH OFF CACHE INTVAL REC A INT TAKE TOTAL TIME 5M REC TIME 5SEC PRE LIGHTING OFF 7 Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of PRE LIGHTING changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 18 Tum the MENU knob until the desired time to turn on the light before starting to record appears As you turn the MENU knob the PRE LIGHTING time changes in the following sequence OFF gt 2SEC lt gt 5SEC gt 10SEC Notes e Set the LIGHT switch on the camcorder to AUTO to turn on the light before recording The light switch must also be set to ON With these settings the light turns on and off automatically However the light remains on continuously if the off time is less than 5 seconds e When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and the light switch is set to ON the light remains on continuously 1 9 Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of PRE LIGHTING returns to
67. not be POOR WHITE AREA _ checked AWB NG The white video level is too high OVER LEVEL Either step down the lens iris or change the ND filter If any of the above error messages is displayed retry the white balance adjustment If the error message occurs again contact your Sony service representative Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance 61 Bulpiooey 104 suas pue sjuewsnipy Jeldey9 1h Bulpsooey 10 sues pue sjuewjsnipy p 13 deyo M 62 If you have no time to adjust the white balance Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST The white balance is automatically set as follows depending on the FILTER selector setting A 5600K B 3200K C 4300K D 6300K For details about setting the white balance automatically see Adjusting the white balance automatically on page 60 White balance memory Values stored in memory are held until the white balance is adjusted again There are two sets of white balance memories A and B and adjustments for each of the filters can be automatically stored in the memory corresponding to the setting A or B of the WHITE BAL switch The camcorder has four built in filters so a total of eight 4 x 2 adjustments can be stored The number of memories allocated to each of A and B can be limited to one without linking to the filter setting by setting WHT FILTER INH page 159 to ON on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu In this case adjustments f
68. of the procedure for setting the shot ID move the mark to ESC at the top right of the screen then push the MENU knob or push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch down to ESCAPE This cancels all changes and returns to the SHOT ID page 5 2 9 Displaying the Status Confirmation Windows You can confirm the settings or status of the camcorder on the screen by displaying the following three windows e ABNORMAL lt gt window e FUNCTION window e AUDIO STATUS window Indications on the windows ABNORMAL lt gt window ABNORMAL lt gt BREE RRR RRR GAIN N 0dB SHUTTER ON WHT PRESET _ON 5600K OFF ATW RUN EXTENDER FILTER OVERRIDE 0 FORMAT OFF 23 98 This window allows you to confirm why the warning indicator lights You can use the LED page of the USER menu to set whether or not the warning indicator lights For details see 5 2 4 Selecting the Items for Which the LED is to Light on page 85 FUNCTION window FUNCTION LT FORMAT 23 98P ASSIGN lt 1 gt 5600K gt AT This window allows you to confirm the assigned function of the ASSIGN 1 2 switches and the TURBO GAIN button ON OFF of the Picture Cache function and ON OFF of the output of the BNC connectors such as TEST OUT and HD SDI OUT connectors AUDIO STATUS window AUDIO STATUS BERR EER RRRRER RRR EMPHASIS OFF DF STEREO CH3 FRONT CH4 FRONT CH1 FRONT REAR 10 0
69. previously set with the setup menu When this selector is operated the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds For details about the shutter speed and mode settings see 4 2 Setting the Electronic Shutter on page 62 AUTO W B BAL automatic white black balance adjustment switch Activates the white balance and black balance automatic adjustment functions WHIT Automatic adjustment of the white balance If the WHITE BAL switch is set to A or B the white balance setting is stored in the corresponding memory The memory stores a separate white balance setting for each filter setting BLK Automatic adjustment of the black set and black balance GAIN selector Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match the lighting conditions during shooting The gains corresponding to the L M and H settings can be selected from the setup menu The factory settings are L 0 dB M 6 dB and H 12 dB When this selector is adjusted the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds Shooting and Recording Playback Functions For details about setting the gain values see 5 3 1 Setting Gain Values for the GAIN Selector Positions on page 93 OUTPUT DCC output signal dynamic contrast control switch Switches the video signal that is output to the VTR viewfinder and video monitor between the following BARS Outputs the color bar signal CAM Outputs the vide
70. set to OFF on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu the settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect the last time the remote control unit was used are recalled Attaching the Rain Cover Not Supplied Connecting the Remote Control Unit Japioowey y dq Bumes z sa deyo HHI 127 Jaepiooweg ey dN Bumes z Ja deyo HAI 128 Function of the VTR START button when the remote control unit is connected You can select the function of the VTR START button on the camcorder when the remote control unit is connected using the VTR START STOP item on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu To disable the camcorder VTR START button and the lens VTR button On the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu set VTR START STOP to RM If the same function as that of the VTR START STOP button is assigned to the ASSIGN 1 switch or the TURBO GAIN button this setting also disables these controls To enable the camcorder VTR START button and the lens VTR button On the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu set VIR START STOP to CAM or PARA If the same function as that of the VTR START STOP button is assigned to the ASSIGN 1 switch or the TURBO GAIN button this setting also enables these controls When VTR START STOP is set to CAM the VTR button on the remote control unit disables When the monitor is connected to the remote control unit The MONITOR connector BNC type of the RM B150 B750 outputs the same signal as
71. status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the viewfinder The settings for Single Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec are maintained until changed However if you switch the camcorder power off all Manual Interval Rec mode settings are cleared except for the NUMBER OF FRAME setting and the single trigger mode selection To use Single Trigger mode of the Manual Interval Rec function again after switching on the power perform steps 1 and 2 Recording in Single Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec Follow the procedure below to shoot a picture in Single Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec When you use blank cassettes such as brand new cassettes be sure to record color bars for more than 2 seconds at the beginning of a cassette After performing the basic procedure for shooting and recording following the instructions in 3 2 1 Basic Procedures on page 37 secure the camcorder so that it will not move 2 Push the VTR START button on the camcorder or the VTR button on the lens The camcorder starts recording in Single Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec The TALLY indicator green in the viewfinder flashes 2 flashes second and the message MANU INTERVAL FRAME flashes on the viewfinder screen Each time you press the VTR START button or the VTR button the camcorder captures and stores the picture data of the preset number of frames The REC indicator in the viewfinder is on while the camcorder is capt
72. strong reflected light flashlight the sun Aliasing When fine patterns stripes or lines are shot they may appear jagged or flicker Appendixes Specifications General Power voltage 12 VDC 5 0 1 0 V Power consumption Approx 34 W with 12 V DC supply when recording Operating temperature 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F Operating humidity 25 to 85 relative humidity Storage temperature 20 C to 60 C F to 140 F Approx 5 4 kg 12 lb 2 oz with microphone viewfinder BCT 40HD cassette and BP GL95 Battery Pack Mass Dimensions in mm inches 127 5 37 11 2 345 135 4 Supplied accessories Shoulder strap 1 XLR connector cover 4 Stereo microphone super cardioid directional external power supply type 1 Operation Guide Japanese version 1 Operation Manual English version 1 CD ROM manual 1 Video Camera Section General Imager 2 3 inch type CCD with 2 000 000 pixels Effective picture elements 1920 H x 1080 V Imager Configuration RGB 3 CCDs Spectral system 1 4 prism system with quartz filter Built in filters CC filter A 5600K B 3200K C 4300K D 6300K ND filter 1 Clear 2 1 4 ND 3 1 16 ND 4 17 64 ND Special bayonet mount F10 standard 89 9 reflection chart 2000 1x Minimum illumination 0 0024 1x at F1 4 42 dB gain 64 frame slow shutter Video S N ratio 54 dB Y typical Registration
73. such as monitor screens Frame frequency Shutter speed 59 94i 30 00 to 4300 Hz 50i 25 00 to 4700 Hz 23 98PsF 24 00 to 2000 Hz 24PsF 24 00 to 2000 Hz 25PsF 25 00 to 2100 Hz 29 97PsF 30 00 to 2500 Hz SLS slow speed shutter mode with an optional HKDW 905R The SLS mode can only be selected when an optional HKDW 905R is installed in the camcorder Use this mode for shooting subjects in low level lighting conditions You can select the shutter speed from among 1 to 8 16 32 and 64 1 30 to 1 4 sec 1 2 sec 1 sec 2 sec EVS Enhanced Vertical definition System mode This mode is used to improved vertical resolution However the sensitivity and dynamic range are reduced This mode can be used together with the Standard or ECS mode Whatever the operating mode of the electronic shutter the sensitivity of the CCD decreases with increasing shutter speed When automatic iris is used the iris opens wider as the shutter speed increases as a result reducing the depth of field Under artificial light particularly fluorescent or mercury lamps the light intensity may appear to be constant but the red green and blue intensities are actually changing in synchronization with the frequency of the power supply causing flicker Using an electronic shutter under such lighting could make the flicker even worse Color flicker is particularly likely to happen when the power supply frequency is 60
74. table appears then push the MENU knob POO USER SAVE ESC DISPLAY MODE USER1 F ID USER2 NO FILE USER4 USERS Display type Description ALL File ID 10 characters and date month day year F ID File ID 16 characters DATE Saved date year month day hours minutes seconds MODEL Information on the model 6 1 3 Loading Saved Data from a Memory Stick The data loaded from the Memory Stick overwrites the data saved in the camcorder 1 Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to USER FILE LOAD on the USER FILE page 13OUSER FILE TOP USER FILE LOAD EXEC USER FILE SAVE EXEC ooooor00000000000 USER PRESET EXEC F ID 2 Push the MENU knob The USER LOAD page appears P00 USER LOAD ESC DISPLAY MODE ALL USER1 JAN 0O1 04 JAN 15 04 FEB 05 04 FEB 20 04 3 Turn the MENU knob until the page that contains the desired file number appears then push the MENU knob Poo USER LOAD DISPLAY MODE 5 ALL USER1 JAN 0O1 04 JAN 15 04 FEB 05 04 FEB 20 04 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to the desired file number to be loaded then push the MENU knob P00 USER LOAD DISPLAY MODE ALL USER1 JAN O1 04 JAN 15 04 FEB 05 04 FEB 20 04 The ACCESS indicator lights Saving and Loading User Files eq Bume s esp Builpeo7 pue Bunes 9 Jajdeyo hhh 109 eyeq Buijes sn Bulpeo pue Bulaeg 9 Jaydeyo HAI 110
75. the Items for Which the LED is to Light on page 85 O VTR SAVE indicator Lights up when the VTR section is set to power save mode by setting the VTR SAVE STBY switch to SAVE Recording and Playback Chapter 3 1 About Cassettes This section describes the procedure for loading and unloading a cassette See Specifications VTR Section on page 138 for information about the cassettes you can use in the camcorder 3 1 1 Loading and Unloading a Cassette Loading a cassette 1 Turn on the POWER switch POWER switch HUMID indicator If the interior of the VTR section is damp the HUMID indicator will light If this happens wait until the indicator goes off before going on to step 2 2 Press the EJECT button The cassette compartment lid will open EJECT button w Cassette compartment lid 3 Check that there is no slack in the tape Then slide in the cassette until it clicks into position and close the cassette lid completely by pressing near the engraved PUSH Insert the cassette Grip Window outwards Cassette holder Push and close the lid e To load the cassette correctly insert the tape with the grip of the camcorder pointing upward as illustrated e When inserting the cassette be careful that you don t hit the tape against the cassette holder Checking the tape for slack Pressing in the r
76. the viewfinder screen The message changes in the following sequence BLACK SET BLACK BALANCE ABB EXECUTING BLACK SET Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance 59 Bulpiooey 104 suas pue sjuewsnipy Jeldey9 1h The black balance adjustment ends in a few seconds with the message ABB OK and the adjustment value is automatically stored in memory e During the black balance adjustment the iris is closed automatically e During the black balance adjustment the gain selection circuit is activated automatically so you may see flickering on the viewfinder screen but this is not a fault If automatic black balance adjustment cannot be made If the black balance adjustment cannot be completed normally an error message will appear for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen in display mode 2 or 3 Possible messages are listed below Black balance adjustment error messages HulpiooeyY 104 suas pue sjuewjsnipy se deyo Mn 60 FILTER selector step 2 OUTPUT DCC switch CAM WHITE BAL switch AorB GAIN selector Set as low as possible 1 White balance setting values are stored in memory B only when the WHITE SWITCH lt B gt item is set to MEM on the FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu Error message Meaning ABB NG The lens iris did not close adjustment IRIS NOT was impossible CLOSED ABB NG Adjustmen
77. to the STBY position the camcorder can automatically turn to power saving mode if the tape does not run for a certain period In such a case the VTR SAVE indicator in the viewfinder lights This function is effective when a setting other than OFF is selected for the STBY OFF TIMER item on the VTR Shooting and Recording Playback Functions MODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu The STBY OFF TIMER item also allows you to select the length of time until the camcorder turns to power saving mode For detailed information see 3 6 Setting the Stand by off Timer During Rec Pause on page 58 EJECT button Press this button to eject or load a cassette REW rewind button and indicator Press this button to rewind the tape The indicator lights during rewinding F FWD fast forward button and indicator Press this button to fast forward the tape The indicator lights during fast forward PLAY button and indicator Press this button to view the recorded picture in the viewfinder or on the color video monitor The indicator lights during playback The four times normal speed search function is provided to make it far quicker to find a desired location of the tape Press the REW button or F FWD button during playback to view the four times normal speed search picture STOP button Press this button to stop the tape 2 5 Menu Operating Section MENU knob D Memory Stick compartment STATUS ON SEL
78. turn on occasionally but do not allow the top bar 0 dB to go on If it goes on the audio level is too high g gt Allbars go on These bars go on BE Normal input level Excessive input level Relationships between recording levels and level controls You can select the audio level controls to be used to adjust the level of the audio signals input to the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connectors using REAR1 WRR LEVEL page 155 and REAR2 WRR LEVEL page 155 on the AUDIO 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu The factory Example 1 Example 2 setting Audio LEVEL CH 1 MIC LEVEL The MIC LEVEL level to control control control is linked CH 1 with LEVEL CH 1 control Audio LEVEL CH 2 MIC LEVEL The MIC LEVEL level to control control control is linked CH 2 with LEVEL CH 2 control Note When you have operation of the LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls and MIC LEVEL control linked together if the MIC LEVEL control is set to 0 the audio signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded Check the position of the MIC LEVEL control before adjusting the LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls 4 4 2 Manually Adjusting the Audio Level of the Front Microphone You can adjust the audio level input from the front microphone connected to the MIC IN connector which is to be recorded on audio channels 1 and 2 When 1 and 2 are not displayed under the audio channel level meters the CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch is s
79. want to move the item then push the MENU knob O2OUSER1 EDIT TOP PUSH TO ITEM INSERT WHITE lt B gt CH AWB TEST OUT MENU OFFSET WHITE lt A gt WARM COOL lt A gt COLOR FINE OFF OFF 3200 MASTER BLACK 0 The item selected in step 1 moves to the position that you selected in step 2 In the above example MASTER BLACK will be moved to the top and the other items are moved down one line To insert a blank line Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the position where you want to insert a blank row and push and hold the MENU knob for about 3 seconds A blank row is inserted O2ZOUSER EDIT TOP H TO ITEM INSERT MASTER BLACK Q WHITE lt B gt CH AUB OFF OFF 3200 0 TEST OUT MENU OFFSET WHITE lt A gt WARM COOL lt A gt COLOR FINE lt A gt Add New Item Push and hold the MENU knob for about 3 seconds O2ZOUSER EDIT MASTER BLACK gt WHITE lt B gt CH TEST OUT MENU OFFSET WHITE lt A gt WARM COOL lt A gt COLOR FINE lt A gt Add New Item In the above example a blank row is inserted between MASTER BLACK and WHITE lt B gt CH You cannot insert a blank row on a page where 10 items have been already registered Adding deleting replacing pages You can add a new page to the USER menu delete a page from the USER menu or replace pages using the EDIT PAGE of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu Menu Organization and Operation 79 sBules pelrejeq pue shej
80. 0 02 or less for entire screen area excluding distortion due to lens Geometric distortion None identified excluding distortion due to lens 135 dB Y typical Lens mount Sensitivity Smear Stereo microphone Type Back electret condenser microphone Directivity Super cardioid Frequency response 100 Hz to 15 kHz Output impedance 70 Q 20 Power voltage 48 V DC Specifications 137 sexipueddy 138 VTR Section General Usable cassette tapes BCT 6HD 12HD 22HD 32HD 40HD 1 2 inch Digital HDCAM cassette tapes Tape speed 96 7 mm s for 59 941 29 97PsF format Record playback time For 59 941 29 97PsF format 40 minutes using BCT 40HD For 50i 25PsF format 48 minutes using BCT 40HD For 24PsF 23 98PsF format 50 minutes using BCT 40HD Fast forward time Approx 5 minutes using BCT 40HD video cassette Approx 5 minutes using BCT 40HD video cassette Continuous recording time Approx 110 minutes using BP GL95 Battery Pack Approx 80 minutes using BP GL65 Battery Pack Rewind time 1 When using an optional HDVF 20A HD Electronic Viewfinder and operating at the normal temperature of 25 C 77 F Digital video Digital video signal format Sampling frequency Y 74 25 MHz Ps Pr 37 125 MHz Quantization 10 bits sample 8 bits sample for compression processing Compression Coefficient recording system Channel coding S NRZI PR IV Error correction Reed Solomon code Error concealment Ad
81. 0 Adjusts the width of the hue possessed by the color detail function Menu List 149 sexipueddy 150 No Page Item Settings Default Description P12 MTX LINEAR MATRIX OFF ON ON Turns the linear matrix correction and user set matrix correction functions on off MATRIX USER OFF ON OFF Turns the user set matrix correction function on off MATRIX PRESET OFF ON ON Turns the preset matrix correction function on off MATRIX PRESET 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 Selects the preset matrix SEL MATRIX R G 99 to 99 0 Sets the arbitrary R G user set matrix coefficients MATRIX R B 99 to 99 0 Sets the arbitrary R B user set matrix coefficients MATRIX G R 99 to 99 0 Sets the arbitrary G R user set matrix coefficients MATRIX G B 99 to 99 0 Sets the arbitrary G B user set matrix coefficients MATRIX B R 99 to 99 0 Sets the arbitrary B R user set matrix coefficients MATRIX B G 99 to 99 0 Sets the arbitrary B G user set matrix coefficients P13 MTX MULTI MATRIX OFF ON OFF Turns the linear matrix correction and multi matrix correction functions on off MATRIX MULTI OFF ON OFF Turns the multi matrix correction function on off MATRIX AREA IND OFF ON OFF Turns the zebra indication on off in the area corresponding to the currently selected setting MATRIX COLOR DET EXEC Sets MTX
82. 00 White balance preset value temperature C TEMP BAL lt P gt 99 to 99 0 The color temperature adjustment is not satisfactory with COLOR TEMP lt P gt adjust the value more precisely R GAIN lt P gt 99 to 99 0 R gain preset value B GAIN lt P gt 99 to 99 0 B gain preset value 5600K lt P gt OFF ON OFF Turns the electric 5600K filter on off AWB ENABLE lt P gt OFF ON OFF Turns the function for judging the AWB adjustment when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRESET on and off M13 DCC ADJUST DCC FUNCTION DCC FIX DCC Selects the function to be assigned to the SEL DCC switch FIX is fixed knee DCC D RANGE 400 450 500 550 600 Sets the dynamic range when the DCC switch 600 is set to the ON position DCC POINT 99 to 99 For the DCC minimum knee point adjustment DCC GAIN 99 to 99 For the gain adjustment to the DCC detected value DCC DELAY TIME 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the DCC reaction speed PREKNEE POINT AUTO FIX AUTO AUTO Special dark knee point adjustment is done with DCC OFF FIX The same preknee point adjustment is done with DCC OFF as with DCC ON Menu List sexipueddy 157 sexipueddy 158 No M14 Page AUTO IRIS 2 Item IRIS WINDOW Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 VAR Default 1 Description Selects the auto iris detection window VAR is variable IRIS WINDOW IND OFF ON OFF Turns the function which displays a frame marker fo
83. 3 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Or if you have used the MAINTENANCE menu before the page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended appears When the CONTENTS page is displayed push the MENU knob once and then turn the MENU knob to move the mark to FORMAT 9 CONTENTS SHOT MARKER 0 t 1 2 3 4 A 5 6 Z 8 9 gt VANC RX Or turn the MENU knob until the FORMAT page appears from the CONTENTS page When any page of the MAINTENANCE menu is displayed turn the MENU knob until the FORMAT page appears Push the MENU knob The FORMAT page appears 18 FORMAT CURRENT Frame NEXT 98 frequency 59 94i 24PsF an L S selecte AREA 29 97PsF 6 Confirm the mark is positioned at NEXT then push the MENU knob 18 FORMAT TOP CURRENT 23 98 NEXT 1723 98 59 94i 24PsF i 25 50i PsF PERES 29 97PsF The gt mark to the left of NEXT changes to a mark and the mark to the left of the setting changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the desired frame frequency appears Setting the Frame Frequency 9 10 18 FORMAT TOP CURRENT 23 98 The frame NEXT 24PsF frequency 59 941 a _ selected on 33 gaPsF 3 S7PsE the NEXT line eee Hel is displayed PLEASE POWER OFF gt ON on a colored TO CHANGE FORMAT background The setting changes in the order of 59 94 4 gt 50i gt 23 98 4 gt 24PsF 4 gt 25PsF gt 29 97
84. 4 Tur the MENU knob until ON appears then push the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item returns to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting returns to a mark The IRIS OVERRIDE item is set to ON factory setting OFF 5 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF The AUTO IRIS page disappears from the viewfinder screen Turn the MENU knob to change the reference value Note When you push the MENU knob in ECS or SLS mode the camcorder enters a mode where you can change the frequency in the ECS mode or the number of frames in the SLS mode by turning the MENU knob 1 The SLS mode is effective only when an optional HKDW 905R extension board is installed in the camcorder The changed reference value is retained until the power of the camcorder is turned off Even if the reference value is changed it reverts to the standard value every time the power is turned on To open the iris by 0 25 stop Turn the MENU knob further counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera One bar L appears in the upper part to the left of the F number in the iris indication To open the iris by 0 5 stop Turn the MENU knob further counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera One bar W appears in the upper part to the left of the F number in the iris indication To open the iris by 0 75 stop Turn the MENU knob further counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera Two bars CJM ap
85. AIN SW GAIN LOW GAIN MID GAIN HIGH GAIN TURBO TURBO SW IND Item Description GAIN LOW Sets the gain value corresponding to the L position of the GAIN selector GAIN MID Sets the gain value corresponding to the M position of the GAIN selector GAIN HIGH Sets the gain value corresponding to the H position of the GAIN selector GAIN TURBO Sets the gain value corresponding to TURBO GAIN button selection TURBO SW IND OFF When you operate the GAIN selector after pressing the TURBO GAIN button once the video gain is changed according to the GAIN selector operation ON When the video gain is boosted to gain value preset by pressing the TURBO GAIN button once the video gain is not changed even if you operated the GAIN selector until you press the TURBO GAIN button once more Adjustments and Settings from Menus 93 sbules pelrejeq pue shejdsiq nua g Jeldey9 Hh sbumes paiejeq pue sfejdsiq nue g Je deyo HAI 94 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to the item you want to set then push the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 4 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting then push the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item returns to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting returns to a mark Any of 3 0 3 6 9 12 18 24 30 36 or 42 dB can be set for each o
86. ASSIGN 1 switch until the desired mark appears If the desired mark disappears from the viewfinder while that mark is displayed the mark recorded before will be overwritten and the mark newly displayed is recorded Notes e Tele File marks are recorded only when they are recorded using the ASSIGN 1 switch to which this function has been assigned e Tele File marks can be added only to the shot recorded just before entering the rec pause mode When the message INVALID OPERATION appears This message appears when you perform one of the following misoperations You push the ASSIGN 1 switch before the camcorder enters the recording pause mode after loading the cassette If you turn off the power of the camcorder in recording pause mode and then turn on the power again the camcorder is in the recording pause mode Then you push the ASSIGN 1 switch in this situation You push the ASSIGN 1 switch in a mode other than recording pause mode Setting the Tele File mark to be recorded for the first time after power on Using the menu you can select the mark to be recorded in the first recording pause mode when you press the ASSIGN 1 switch after you turn on the power of the camcorder This menu setting allows the camcorder to display a mark when you use the Tele File mark for the first time after you turn on the power of the camcorder When you press the ASSIGN 1 switch after that the last selected mark appears Recording th
87. B Values for the GAIN Selector 24dB 30dB 36dB Positions on page 93 GAIN HIGH 42dB 12dB GAIN TURBO 42dB TURBO SW IND OFF ON OFF O 11 VF SETTING ZEBRA OFF ON OFF See 5 2 6 Setting the ZEBRA SELECT 1 2 BOTH 1 viewingertonpage 98 ZEBRA1 DET LVL 50 to 105 70 1 steps ZEBRA2 DET LVL 95 to 105 100 1 steps ASPECT OFF ON OFF VF DETAIL LEVEL 99 to 99 VF DTL H LEVEL 99 to 99 VF DTL V LEVEL 99 to 99 O 12 AUTO IRIS IRIS OVERRIDE OFF ON OFF See 4 3 Changing the Reference Value for z IRIS SPEED 0 1 2 3 4 5 3 Automatic Iris Adjustment on E CLIP HIGH LIGHT OFF ON OFF page 66 x IRIS WINDOW 1 2 3 4 5 6 VAR 1 IRIS WINDOW IND OFF ON OFF IRIS VAR WIDTH 20 to 479 240 IRIS VAR HEIGHT 20 to 269 135 IRIS VAR H POS 460 to 460 0 IRIS VAR V POS 249 to 249 0 144 Menu List USER No Page Item Settings Default Description menu O 13 SHOT ID ID 1 12 characters See 5 2 8 Setting the Shot ID 2 ID on page 89 ID 3 ID 4 O 14 SHOT DISP SHOT DATE OFF ON OFF See 5 2 7 Recording Shot Data Superimposed on the SHOT TIME OFF ON OFF Color Bars on page 88 SHOT MODEL NAME OFF ON OFF SHOT SERIAL NO OFF ON OFF SHOT ID SEL OFF ID 1 ID 2 ID 3 OFF ID 4 SHOT BLINK CHARA OFF ON OFF O 15 SET STATUS STATUS ABNORMAL OFF ON ON See 5 2 9 Displaying the Status Confirmation STATU
88. BY and check that the VTR SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes off Set the F RUN SET R RUN to R RUN Set the DISPLAY switch to CTL Press the VTR START button and check the following points e The tape reels are turning e The counter indication is changing e The REC indicator in the viewfinder is on e The RF and SERVO indicators on the display panel are off Press the VTR START button again and check that the tape stops and that the REC indicator in the viewfinder goes off Repeat the checks of steps 5 and 6 this time using the VTR button on the lens Press the RESET button and check that the indication in the counter display is 00 00 00 00 Turn on the LCD LIGHT switch and check that the display panel is illuminated 10 Hold down the REW button to rewind the tape for a while then push the PLAY button Check that the rewind and playback functions operate normally 11 Press the STOP button and press the F FWD button Check that the fast forward function operates normally 2 Testing the automatic audio level adjusting functions Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 and CH 2 switches to FRONT Set the AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 switches to AUTO Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting S Set the CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch to CH 1 2 Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector at a suitable sound source Check that the level indications for channels 1 and 2 correspond to the sound level respectively
89. C OFF F MIC MONO STEREO PICTURE CACHE ON OFF TEST OUT CHARACTER MARKER RE TAKE ATU RETURN UIDEO LENS RET REC SWITCH ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt ESC OFF F MIC_ MONO STEREO PICTURE CACHE ON OFF TEST QUT CHARACTER MARKER ZEBRA TURBO SW ESC OFF F MIC_ MONO STEREO PICTURE CACHE ON OFF TEST QUT CHARACTER MARKER RE TAKE ATW RETURN VIDEO LENS RET REC SWITCH Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 1 push type switch and the TURBO GAIN button Function Description TURBO Assigns the TURBO GAIN function SWITCH TELE FILE Assigns the function to the Tele File MARK mark recording button ZEBRA Assigns the zebra pattern display function 5600K Applies an electrical 5600K filter UA01 to Assigns the items assigned on the UA10 9 ASSIGN EDIT page 1 The assigned function is effective only when an optional HKDW 703 is installed 2 Even if the RETURN VIDEO item is set to OFF on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu you can use this switch to display the image of the return video signal on the viewfinder 3 This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the ASSIGN EDIT menu 4 To assign the items to the ASSIGN EDIT menu use the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 2 slide type switch Function Content OFF Disables the switch F MIC Assign
90. Code on page 72 and 4 5 3 Setting the User Bits on page 73 DATA DISPLAY switch U BIT Displays the user bit value SHOT TIME Displays the date and time from the shot data SHOT NO Not used 2 7 Warnings and Indications Besides the viewfinder speaker and earphones the indicators and displays described in this section also provide you with information such as the operating state of the camcorder and warnings TALLY indicator DISPLAY ASPECT switch TALLY switch BACK TALLY indicator B BACK TALLY switch LCD LIGHT switch O WARNING indicator Display panel REAR TALLY indicator TALLY indicator Setting the TALLY switch on the viewfinder to HIGH or LOW enables this indicator It lights when the VTR starts recording Like the REC indicator in the viewfinder it also flashes to provide warnings The brightness of this indicator when it is lit can be switched with the TALLY switch DISPLAY ASPECT display aspect control switch Turns the markers on or off and changes the viewfinder screen aspect ratio DISPLAY When the MARKER is set to ON on the MARKER 1 page of the USER menu pushing this switch to DISPLAY toggles the markers on the viewfinder screen on and off ASPECT Pushing this switch to ASPECT toggles the viewfinder screen aspect ratio between 16 9 and 4 3 For details see 5 2 5 Setting Marker Display on page 87 Note Setting the ME
91. Corporation Index Symbols 48V OFF switches 21 P LED 143 P LED page 86 LED STD 86 143 A ABNORMAL lt gt window 91 AC adaptor 117 ACCESS indicator 27 Accessory Attachments 18 Accidental erasure 36 AC DN10 117 Actual time in the time code 72 ADVANCE button 30 ALARM volume control 20 Aliasing 136 ALL FILE 161 ALL menu 75 Anton Bauer Ultralight System 117 ASSIGN 1 2 switches 24 ASSIGN EDIT 80 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt window 97 ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt window 97 Assignable Switches 96 ATW 62 142 Audio channel level meter 32 Audio Functions 19 AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors 21 AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 switches 21 Audio level 68 AUDIO OUT connector 21 AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 switches 20 AUDIO STATUS window 91 AUDIO 1 154 AUDIO 2 154 AUDIO 3 155 Auto Interval Rec mode 43 AUTO IRIS 144 AUTO IRIS2 158 AUTO IRIS page 66 Auto Tracing White 62 142 AUTO W B BAL switch 24 Automatic black balance adjustment 59 Automatic iris adjustment 66 Automatic iris window 67 Automatic white balance adjustment 60 BACK TALLY indicator 31 BACK TALLY switch 31 BATT indicator 34 BATTERY 153 Battery attachment 17 Battery pack 116 Battery status indicator 32 BKW 401 118 Black balance 59 BLACK GAMMA 148 BLACK SHADING 152 BLACK FLARE 147 BP GL65 GL95 L60S 116 BRIGHT control 22 Built in speaker 20 C Camera operator tally indicator 23 CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch
92. D ROM 2 Select and click on the operation manual that you want to read This opens the PDF file of the operation manual The files may not be displayed properly depending on the version of Adobe Reader In such a case install the latest version you can download from the URL mentioned in 4 1 Preparations above e If you have lost or damaged the CD ROM you can purchase a new one to replace it Contact your Sony service representative e You can purchase a printed version of the operation manual English version Contact your Sony service representative Precautions Using the CD ROM Manual 15 ile A M JM AO Je deyo 16 When ordering be sure to specify the part number of the manual you want Part No Models covered 3 991 858 0X HDW F900R Using the CD ROM Manual Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Chapter 2 1 Power Supply POWER switch LIGHT switch Battery attachment DC IN connector Battery attachment Attach a battery pack BP GL65 BP GL95 or BP L60S Alternatively by attaching an AC DN10 AC Adaptor you can operate the camcorder from AC power DC IN connector XLR type 4 pin male To operate the camcorder using an AC power supply connect an AC 550 550CE AC Adaptor with the DC output cable supplied with the adaptor To use an external battery connect its DC output cable to the DC IN connecto
93. E OUTPUT DCC BARS GAIN Set as low as possible Testing the viewfinder 1 Adjust the position of the viewfinder 2 Check that the color bars are displayed on the viewfinder screen and adjust the BRIGHT CONTRAST and PEAKING controls to give the best color bar display Check each of the following operations The menu is displayed on the viewfinder screen Turn the MENU knob and check that the menu page changes to the next page Push the MENU knob and check that settings of each item of the selected page are displayed Turn the MENU knob and check that the gt mark moves within the page Push the MENU knob and check that the mark placed before the item changes to a mark and the mark placed before the setting of the item changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob and check that the setting of the selected item changes Set the OUTPUT DCC switch to CAM and change the inner FILTER ND filter selector position in the sequence of 1 2 3 and 4 and the outer FILTER CC filter selector position in the sequence B C D A and B Check that the FILTER indicator on the viewfinder screen displays the correct numbers Carry out of the following operations and check that that the indicator lights if the corresponding item has been turned on the l LED page of the USER menu Set the gain to anything but 0 dB by using the GAIN selector and the GAIN SW page of the OPERATION menu Set the
94. E tones EE E EE E O E E 92 Adjustments and Settings from Menus 000 93 5 3 1 Setting Gain Values for the GAIN Selector Positions 93 5 3 2 Selecting Output SiBtial ss cseacsavess de weaps ere ences 94 5 3 3 Setting the Color Temperature Manually 0 95 5 3 4 Specifying an Offset for the Auto White Balance Setting 95 5 3 5 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches 96 5 3 6 Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock 2 000000000 98 5 3 7 S l ctn S a Lens HIG sia ack Ga nasesoteudes n a 99 5 3 8 Using UMID Dates ccosu ccc csenscnaes ices uartocsbeesia Monae taeeeees 100 5 3 9 Using the Hyper Gamma eeeceeeeeeeceeeeeceneeeeeneeeees 102 5 3 10 Using the USER Gamma ac civeiusiontivecetioladad was 103 Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Standard SOTA Ke Pe E A E E AE 104 Chapter 6 Saving and Loading User Setting Data 6 1 Saving and Loading User Files cccccssssseeeeeeeeees 106 6 1 1 Handling the Memory Stick oie eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 106 6 1 2 Saving USER Menu Data User File to the Memory SUCK iss dean naa a A a a aden aaa aa 107 6 1 3 Loading Saved Data from a Memory Stick 109 6 2 Saving and Loading Scene Files cccssseeeseees 110 6 2 1 Saving a Scene File 425 caccceos cies ecawiateaccauatncenciseceaar ees 110 6 2 2 Loading a Scene Piles sscciccessescessessecsnvscoasaserssacessacaceesens 112 6 2 3 Resetting the Camcorder Settings to
95. E1 FRONT F S1 FRONT When recording the front microphone sound on audio channel CH 1 select which control is to be used for the level adjustment SIDE 1 Adjust it with the LEVEL control left side on the side panel FRONT Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control on the front panel F S1 It can be adjusted using either the LEVEL control left side or the MIC LEVEL control The two controls are linked to each other MIC CH2 LEVEL SIDE2 FRONT F S2 FRONT When recording the front microphone sound on audio channel CH 2 select which control is to be used for the level adjustment SIDE 2 Adjust it with the LEVEL control right side on the side panel FRONT Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control on the front panel F S2 It can be adjusted using either the LEVEL control right side or the MIC LEVEL control The two controls are linked to each other REAR1 WRR LEVEL SIDE1 FRONT F S1 SIDE 1 Selects any of these controls to adjust the audio level of the equipment that is connected to the wireless microphone and whatever is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 connector on the rear panel SIDE 1 Adjust it with the LEVEL control left side on the side panel FRONT Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control on the front panel F S1 It can be adjusted using either the LEVEL control left side or the MIC LEVEL control The two controls are linked to each other REAR2 WRR LEVEL SIDE2 FRONT F
96. ERA TION Ment sicsiscissesccescaccsdzasusnaesouncesansede codaceasticneraeceans 140 PAINT NICHI netanna e r E Shaheen desea cac bean 147 MAIN TENANCE Ment e cssis cesssssghesnsadegiedsatanesestessrantaasteoeace 152 FILE Menu ssicdiciassnvciactavciausicaessisediieiestedats a n diodes 161 DIAGNOSIS Mentiin orne aa eve E meter 164 About a Memory Stick csssecececeesssseeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 165 MOOK icici E T lid vedewaubhand debe TT 167 8 Table of Contents Setting the Frame Frequency The factory setting of the frame frequency of the camcorder is 23 98PsF To use the camcorder with a format other than the 23 98PsF format you should change the setting of the frame frequency first Switch cover MENU ON OFF switch POWER switch MENU knob Set the POWER switch to ON 2 Open the switch cover and then set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON while pushing the MENU knob The TOP menu appears lt TOP MENU gt USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE OPERATION MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to MAINTENANCE then push the MENU knob When the MAINTENANCE menu is used for the first time the CONTENTS page appears When a question mark appears at the top left of the title page you can switch pages by turning the MENU knob DO CONTENTS WHT SHADING BLK_SHADING LEVEL ADJ SD LEVEL ADJ BATTERY AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 TIME CODE UTR MODE 4 02 0
97. ESET EXEC Returns pages and items registered in the USER menu to the factory default state LOAD CUSTOM DATA OFF ON OFF Selects whether to read the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE settings to be loaded by USER FILE LOAD LOAD OUT OF USER OFF ON OFF Selects whether to read pages not registered by USER FILE LOAD BEFORE FILE PAGE OFF ON OFF Selects whether to read data after USER FILE pages by USER FILE LOAD USER LOAD WHITE OFF ON OFF Selects whether to read white balance data by USER FILE LOAD FO3 ALL FILE ALL FILE LOAD EXEC Loads the ALL file ALL FILE SAVE EXEC Saves the ALL file F ID 16 characters To name the ALL file ALL PRESET _ EXEC Returns items in the ALL file to preset values STORE ALL PRESET EXEC Sets the preset values of items in the ALL file CLEAR ALL PRESET EXEC Clears the preset values of items in the ALL file 3SEC CLR PRESET OFF ON OFF Turns the function to clear the standard setting when the MENU knob is kept pressed for 3 seconds on and off F04 SCENE FILE 1 See 6 2 Saving and Loading Scene Files on 2 a page 110 3 pe 4 5 STANDARD SCENE RECALL EXEC SCENE STORE EXEC Menu List sexipueddy 161 sexipueddy 162 No Page Item Settings Default Description F05 REFERENCE REFERENCE STORE EXEC Saves the reference file in intern
98. ET INS DEL Push the MENU knob ID 1 ESC The mark changes 4 to a mark ESHOT ID NAMEE END ABCDEFGH I JKLMNOPQRSTUVW XYZ 0123456789 amp x 1 lt 70 RET INS DEL To enter a space Move the mark over the INS then push the MENU knob The space is entered in the position under the mark on the character entry row When there is a character under the mark subsequent characters move to the right one at a time ID 1 ESC BSHOT IDNAME E END ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUVW Move the mark over XYZ 0123456789 amp 0 kt INS Push the MENU knob Space ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUVW XYZ 0123456789 amp xt rafts SP 28 4 RET INS DEL Move the mark over RET then push the MENU knob The mark over the space on the character entry row changes to a mark To delete a character Move the mark over DEL then push the MENU knob The character under the mark is deleted and the subsequent characters move to the left one at a time To cancel deletion of the character Move the mark over RET then push the MENU knob The mark on the character entry row changes toa mark 5 To enter any remaining characters repeat step 4 6 When you finish entering characters turn the MENU knob to move the mark over END then push the MENU knob The character setting mode is cleared and the SHOT ID page appears To cancel entering or changing a shot ID Before executing step 6
99. Example 1 Example 2 setting Audio MIC LEVEL LEVEL CH 1 The MIC LEVEL level to control control control is linked CH 1 with LEVEL CH 1 control Audio MIC LEVEL LEVEL CH 2 The MIC LEVEL level to control control control is linked CH 2 with LEVEL CH 2 control Note When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL control and LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls linked together if the LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls are set to 0 the audio signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded Check the position of the LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls before adjusting the MIC LEVEL control Adjusting the Audio Level 4 4 3 Input Level of Audio Channels CH 3 and CH 4 Selecting the audio input signals to be recorded You can select the audio input signal to be recorded for audio channels CH 3 and CH 4 by using the AUDIO IN CH 3 CH 4 switches F In stereo recording the audio signal lt n of the L channel is recorded In monaural recording the monaural AUTO audio signal is recorded Gle R The audio signal input to the AUDIO gt R IN CH1 connector is recorded gt w W The audio signal of the wireless microphone is recorded F In stereo recording the audio signal AUTO of the R channel is recorded F In monaural recording the monaural R audio signal is recorded ff w R The audio signal input to the AUDIO IN CH2 connector is recorded W The audio signal of the wireless microphone is recor
100. Hz However if the power frequency is 50 Hz setting the shutter speed to 1 100 can reduce this flicker When a bright object is shot in EVS mode or ECS mode in such a manner that it fills the screen the upper edge of the picture may have poor quality because of an inherent characteristic of CCDs Before using EVS mode or ECS mode check the shooting conditions The EVS mode is not effective for 23 98PsF 24PsF 25PsF and 29 97PsF formats You can turn the EVS mode on or off on the SW STATUS page of the PAINT menu page 147 Setting the shutter mode and the shutter speed in standard mode Once the shutter speed is selected it is retained even when the camcorder power is turned off 1 Follow the procedure described in 5 2 2 Selecting Display Items page 84 to set the VF DISP MODE item to 2 or 3 on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu 2 Push the SHUTTER selector from ON to SELECT SHUTTER selector 4 2 2 Selecting the Shutter Mode and Shutter Speed Use the SHUTTER selector to select a shutter mode or a standard mode shutter speed To set the shutter speed in ECS or SLS mode with the SHUTTER selector set to ON and the ECS or SLS mode selected use the MENU knob for adjustment You can use the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu to narrow the range of choice in advance or to select in advance whether or not you use ECS SLS For details see Changing the range of choice of shutte
101. L ASPECT MASK 100 MARKER You can set the following items on the MARKER 1 page 5 2 5 Setting Marker Display The MARKER 1 page of the USER menu allows you to switch the display of the center and safety zone markers on or off and to select the area indicated by the safety zone marker Item Description MARKER When you do not want to display all markers set to OFF CENTER To display the center marker set to ON CENTER Selects the type of center marker 1 to MARK 4 when CENTER is set to ON SAFETY To display the safety zone set to ON ZONE SAFETY Selects the safety zone range 80 AREA 90 92 5 or 95 when SAFETY ZONE is set to ON ASPECT To display the aspect marker set to ON ASPECT Selects the type 15 9 14 9 13 9 4 3 SELECT 1 85 2 35 of the aspect marker ASPECT To make the areas out of the selected MASK aspect marker dimmer set to ON ASPECT Sets the mask level 0 to 8 when the MASK LVL ASPECT MASK is set to ON 100 To display the effective pixel area set to MARKER ON 1 The ASPECT MASK item is for processing the signal to be output to the viewfinder When R G or B is selected for the OUTPUT SELECT item from the menu the masked video signal is output to the TEST OUT connector Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen 87 sBules pelrejeq pue shejdsiq nua g Je dey9 HHI sbumes paliejeq pue sfejdsiq nue g Je deyo HAI 3 Perform t
102. L MID HIGH Sets the luminance level at which the low key H MID HIGH saturation function becomes effective Y BLACK GAMMA OFF ON OFF Turns the Y black gamma function on off Y BLK GAM LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Sets the gamma curve in the low luminance part Y BLK GAM RANGE LOW L MID HIGH Sets the luminance level at which the Y black H MID HIGH gamma becomes effective P16 SCENE FILE 1 C Recalls the scene file saved in the memory of 2 aa the camcorder 3 4 5 STANDARD Clears all current detail adjusted settings and switch settings and returns the settings to the standard settings saved in the reference file SCENE RECALL Recalls the scene file from the memory of the camcorder or the Memory Stick SCENE STORE E Stores the scene file in the memory of the camcorder or the Memory Stick F ID 16 characters Sets the File ID 1 When Y is selected in the camcorder with an optional HKDW 702 902R the color signal is output from the connector whose selected output signal is a SD signal 2 When an optional HKDW 702 902R is installed the HD SDI OUT connector located on the side of the camcorder can be used as the VBS SDI output connector 3 When one of 50i 25PsF or 24PsF is selected 105 0 is the factory setting 4 This item is displayed when an optional HKDW 702 902R is installed When an HKDW 702 is installed the SD output signal is not effective for 23 98PsF 24PsF When an HKDW
103. M B150 B750 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen 83 sBules pelrejeq pue shejdsiq nuaw g Je deyo HHI sbumes paliejeq pue sfejdsiq nue g Je deyo HAI 84 Filter This indicates the currently selected filter types 5600K indication This appears when the electric 5600K color temperature filter function has been activated on the FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu When AWB is executed for shooting an object of high color temperature and 5600K may be set to ON automatically Time code This indicates the time code user bits or other information selected by the DISPLAY switch and DATA DISPLAY switch settings For more information see Relationships between the DISPLAY switch and DATA DISPLAY switch settings and the time counter displays on page 33 ID number This indicates the ID number selected from ID 1 to ID 4 The ID number is recorded together with the color bars Date and time This indicates the date and time of recording which are recorded together with the color bars Model name and serial number This indicates the model name and serial number of the camcorder which are recorded together with the color bars 5 2 2 Selecting Display Items To select the items to be displayed on the viewfinder screen from the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the USER menu turn the indication next to each item on or off CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch
104. MAIN remaining capacity of an internal battery pack or an external battery connected to the DC IN connector DISP DC IN Displayed when the power is supplied from an external battery connected to the DC IN connector DISP WRR RF LVL Displays the reception level of the wireless microphone DISP TIME CODE Displays the time code 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item you want to set then push the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 4 Turn the MENU knob to select whether the selected item should appear in the viewfinder display the ON setting or not appear the OFF setting then push the MENU knob The mark returns to a mark and the mark returns to a mark Note that pushing the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to CANCEL PRST on this page has no effect 5 To continue setting other items repeat steps 3 and 4 6 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Setting change confirmation adjustment progress messages and display modes Y Message is displayed N Message is not displayed Message Message Display display mode setting conditions 1 2 13 When the SS 1 100 or 1 125 N IY IY shutter speed 1 250 1 500 1 1000 and mode 1 2000 ECS SLS setting has been changed When the black E g AWB OK For N IY IY or white balance details se
105. Memory Label Operation 55 3 4 4 Confirming the Remaining Capacity on the Memory Label 56 3 4 5 Clearing Recorded Data nsssneeeseesseesseseseresseeessressresse 56 Freezing a Picture During Playback ssseeseee 57 Setting the Stand by off Timer During Rec Pause 58 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4 1 4 2 4 4 4 5 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance 59 4 1 1 Adjusting the Black Balance eee eeeceseeeereeeeeees 59 4 1 2 Adjusting the White Balance 0 ec eeeeeeteeeetteeeeneees 60 Setting the Electronic Shutter ccccsssseeeeeeeeesseeeees 62 4 2 1 Shutter Modes iea nt A E R eileen 62 4 2 2 Selecting the Shutter Mode and Shutter Speed 63 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris PGIUSTMG I as cdaticcaadecsededaeciteetwccecdacasacatdancareannaceeiaucdendaens 66 Adjusting the Audio Level eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 68 4 4 1 Manually Adjusting the Audio Input Level of the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 Connectors ssi ss2scsdsceasec tee ieceaiaeds eee ieaes 68 4 4 2 Manually Adjusting the Audio Level of the Front Microphones ccc ia eon E E e S nals O E meee 69 4 4 3 Input Level of Audio Channels CH 3 and CH 4 70 Setting the Time Data cccccsseeseeeeeeeesssseeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 72 4 5 1 Setting the Time AOME sul eo sciscues decay Aachieuiiel sc hearse Uadaanavenens 12 4 5 2 Saving the Actual Time in the Time Code
106. N connector between stereo and monaural sound For details see 5 3 5 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches on page 96 MIC IN microphone input connector XLR type 5 pin female Connect the supplied microphone to this connector A microphone other than the supplied one may also be connected if it can operate with the power 48 V supplied from this connector MIC microphone LEVEL control Adjusts the audio level of the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector EARPHONE jacks minijacks You can monitor the E E sound during recording and play back sound during playback Plugging an earphone into the jack automatically cuts off the built in speaker When an alarm is indicated you can hear the alarm sound through the earphone You can connect earphones to both connectors at the same time 1 E E Abbreviation of Electric to Electric In E E mode video and audio signals input to the camcorder are output after passing through internal electric circuits only This can be used to check input signals MONITOR switch and CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch Determine the channel selection for audio monitor output MONITOR CH 1 CH 3 MIX mix MONITOR switch CH 2 CH 4 CH 1 2 CH 3 4 CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch Determines the pair of audio channels selected with the MONITOR switch CH 1 2 position channels 1 and 2 CH 3 4 position channels 3 and 4 The sig
107. N switch is set to R RUN When it is set to the F RUN position VITC is recorded Camcorder operations in Picture Cache mode The recording procedure in Picture Cache time is basically the same as that for normal recording However note the following differences e When you record in Picture Cache mode the picture you shoot is recorded to tape after the Picture Cache time elapses For this reason the tape does not stop immediately when you press the VTR START button After the VTR START button is pressed all tape operation buttons EJECT REW F FWD PLAY and STOP stop functioning until the Picture Cache time has elapsed During this time if you press the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens recording starts again as if there were no pause in recording The time the tape stops after stopping recording is equals the Picture Cache time set previously When the picture data for the duration of the Picture Cache time is not stored in memory due to the subsequent operations the time until the tape stops equals the duration actually stored and may be shorter than the Picture Cache time You start recording immediately after selecting the Picture Cache mode You start recording immediately after changing the Picture Cache time You start recording immediately after playback or recording review You start recording in the Picture Cache mode immediately after the power is turned on e The time code sto
108. NT except OFF 2SEC 5SEC OFF TRIGGER INTERVAL set 10SEC to M PRE LIGHTING M INT 1 2 4 8 1 NUMBER OF FRAME M INT M 1 to 10 15 20 30 M TRIGGER INTERVAL 40 50 SEC 1 to 10 15 20 30 40 50 MIN 1 2 3 4 6 12 24 H Menu List sexipueddy 141 sexipueddy 142 USER No Page Item Settings Default Description menu 03 FUNCTION 2 5600K OFF ON OFF Turns the function which electrically applies a 5600K color temperature filter on and off WHITE SWITCH lt B gt MEM ATW MEM Sets the function of the WHITE BAL B switch SHOCKLESS WHITE OFF 1 2 3 1 Changes the white gain smoothly when operating the WHITE BAL switch ATW SPEED 1to5 4 Changes the speed of the Auto Tracing White operation LOW LIGHT OFF ON OFF Turns the warning display on off when the video average level is less than the preset value LOW LIGHT LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Sets the level at which the LOW LIGHT function becomes effective VF BATT WARNING 10 20 10 Sets the threshold value of remaining battery capacity to make the remaining capacity indication flash PB VIDEO ALL HDSDI ALL Selects the output destination of the recorded video signals See 3 3 3 Checking the Camera Picture on the Viewfinder and or Color Video Monitor on page 52 ABS VF MENU OFF ON OFF Indicates the items indicated as relative values as abs
109. NU ON OFF switch to ON displays the menu on the viewfinder screen even if the DISPLAY switch is set to OFF TALLY switch Controls the TALLY indicator as follows HIGH The TALLY indicator brightness is high OFF The TALLY indicator is off LOW The TALLY indicator brightness is low BACK TALLY indicator When the BACK TALLY switch is set to ON this indicator has the same function as the TALLY indicator BACK TALLY switch Enables or disables the BACK TALLY and REAR TALLY indicators ON The BACK TALLY and REAR TALLY indicators are enabled Warnings and Indications 31 S 01 U0Q pUe seq JO suonouny pue suoneoogq zg sa deu9 hhh S 01 U09 pUe Sed JO suonouny pue suoneooq z 13 deyo 32 OFF The BACK TALLY and REAR TALLY indicators are disabled LCD LIGHT switch Turns on off the display panel light WARNING indicator Lights up or flashes when there is a fault in the VTR For details see 8 3 Operation Warnings on page 135 Display panel Displays VTR related warnings battery status tape status audio levels time data and so on For details see 2 8 Warnings and Indications on the Display Panel on page 32 REAR TALLY indicator When the BACK TALLY switch is set to ON this indicator has the same function as the BACK TALLY indicator Warnings and Indications on the Display Panel 2 8 Warnings and Indications on the Display Panel Tape status battery sta
110. OINT DETAIL LEVEL R B GAIN R B BLACK RM B150 B750 connected o o RM B150 B750 not connected As a result when a remote control unit is connected to the camcorder the effective data region is switched to the remote control data region and the settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect last time the remote control unit was used are recalled Settings of the absolute value volume and absolute value switches 7 are overwritten by those on the remote control unit after the remote control unit is connected When the remote control unit is removed from the camcorder the independent data region becomes effective As a result the camcorder will return to the settings that were in effect before the remote control unit was connected 1 Absolute value volume The data corresponding to the rotation degree position of the volume knob is output The data corresponding to the rotation amount change is called the relative value volume 2 Absolute value switch Toggle switches or slide switches except the temporary switches or controls whose positions must coincide with their functions are called absolute value switches To use settings of the paint adjustment data stored in the independent data region even when you disconnect a remote control unit Set RM COMMON MEMORY to ON on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu In this case the settings stored in the independent data regi
111. PE Use this switch when the menu page which has a hierarchical structure is opened Each time the switch is pushed to this position the page returns to one stage higher in the hierarchy Menu Operating Section 2 6 Time Code System ADS a Se GENLOCK IN connector O TC IN connector TC OUT connector Time code functions 1 GENLOCK IN connector BNC type This connector inputs an HD reference signal when the camera is to be genlocked or when the time code is to be synchronized with external equipment When the time code is to be synchronized with external equipment this connector can input an NTSC PAL analog composite signal as the reference video signal This connector also inputs a return video signal You can display the image of the return video signal on the viewfinder screen when you set RETURN VIDEO to ON on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu You can assign the RETURN VIDEO function to the ASSIGN 1 switch For details see 5 3 5 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches on page 96 TC IN time code input connector BNC type To synchronize the time code of this camcorder to an external time code input the reference time code to this connector TC OUT time code output connector BNC type To synchronize the time code of an external VTR to that of the camcorder connect this connector to the reference time code input connector of the external VTR Time Code
112. Picture at Intervals Interval Rec Function with the HKDW 703 Installing an optional HKDW 703 extension board in the camcorder enables the camcorder to record pictures at various intervals There are two kinds of Interval Rec mode Auto Interval Rec In Auto Interval Rec mode pictures are automatically shot a frame at a time at the specified interval and stored in memory To use this function you must set the total time for shooting TAKE TOTAL TIME and the length of time for recording on the tape REC TIME Manual Interval Rec There are two modes of Manual Interval Rec e Single Trigger mode Setting the number of frames to be recorded at one shooting NUMBER OF FRAME enables the camcorder to record the number of frames preset each time the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens is pressed Continuous Trigger mode Pictures are automatically shot by preset frames at preset intervals by pressing the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens In Auto Interval Rec and Continuous Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec by setting the PRE LIGHTING function to ON the light connected to the LIGHT connector automatically turns on before recording starts This allows you to record pictures under stable light and color temperature conditions Auto Interval Rec mode settings To make settings before shooting To record in Auto Interval Rec mode you need to turn on Auto Interval Rec and set the total time from start to fi
113. PsF 25PsF 29 97 O 08 MARKER 1 MARKER OFF ON OFF See 5 2 5 Setting Marker CENTER OFF ON OFF Display on page 87 CENTER MARK 1 2 3 4 3 SAFETY ZONE OFF ON OFF SAFETY AREA 80 90 92 5 90 95 ASPECT OFF ON OFF ASPECT SELECT 15 9 14 9 13 9 4 3 4 3 1 85 2 35 ASPECT MASK OFF ON OFF ASPECT MASK LVL 0to8 0 100 MARKER OFF ON OFF Menu List sexipueddy 143 USER No Page Item Settings Default Description menu 09 MARKER 2 USER BOX OFF ON OFF Turns the box cursor on off USER BOX WIDTH 1 to 479 240 Adjusts the width from the center to right or left side of the box cursor USER BOX HEIGHT 1 to 269 135 Adjusts the height from the center to top or bottom of the box cursor USER BOX H POS 480 to 479 0 Adjusts the H position of the center USER BOX V POS 270 to 269 0 Adjusts the V position of the center CENTER H POS 479 to 479 0 Adjusts the H position of the center marker CENTER V POS 268 to 268 0 Adjusts the V position of the center marker ASPECT SAFE ZONE OFF ON OFF Turns the SAFETY ZONE display on or off for the aspect mode selected in the ASPECT SELECT item on the MARKER 1 page ASPECT SAFE AREA 80 90 92 5 90 Selects the range of the 95 aspect safety zone O 10 GAIN SW GAIN LOW 3dB 0dB 3dB 6dB 0dB See 5 3 1 Setting Gain GAIN MID 9dB 12dB 18dB 6d
114. RBO SW TURBO FRONT MIC SELECT STRED DF NDF END SEARCH OFF CACHE INTVAL REC M INT NUMBER OF FRAME TRIGGER INTERVAL SMIN PRE LIGHT OFF Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of TRIGGER INTERVAL changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 10 Turn the MENU knob to display M O30FUNCTION ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt i ATU ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt OFF TURBO SW TURBO FRONT MIC SELECT STREO DF NDF DF END SEARCH OFF CACHE INTVAL REC M INT NUMBER OF FRAME 1 TRIGGER INTERVAL M PRE LIGHTING OFF If you turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise the number changes in the following sequence M gt ISEC gt 2SEC 12H gt 24H When M appears the TALLY indicator green flashes 2 flashes second and PRE LIGHTING disappears 1 1 Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of TRIGGER INTERVAL returns to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting returns to a mark 12 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Recording 47 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey g saydeyo WHI yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey E Ja deyo HAI 48 The menu display disappears from the viewfinder screen and the message MANU INTERVAL FRAME indicating the single trigger mode of the Manual Interval Rec mode appears along the bottom of the viewfinder FRAME indicates the number of frames set in step 6 The display indicating the current
115. REO DF DF END SEARCH OFF CACHE INTVAL REC 2M INT NUMBER OF FRAME 1 TRIGGER INTERVAL SMIN PRE LIGHTING FF As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes in the following sequence OFF gt CACHE lt gt A INT lt gt M INT When M INT appears the camcorder is in Manual Interval Rec mode and the TALLY indicator green in the viewfinder flashes NUMBER OF FRAME TRIGGER INTERVAL and RE LIGHTING appear 3 Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of CACHE INTVAL REC changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to NUMBER OF FRAME OSOFUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt TURBO SW TURBO T MIC SELECT ON BR yE D Py INTUAL REC M TNT ER OF FRAME GER INTERVAL SMIN PRE LIGHTING FF 5 Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of NUMBER OF FRAME changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob until the desired number of frames to be recorded in each shot appears As you turn the MENU knob the number changes in the following sequence 1 2 gt 4 lt gt 8 Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of NUMBER OF FRAME returns to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting returns to a mark Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to TRIGGER INTERVAL OSOFUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt TU
116. S FUNCTION OFF ON ON Windows on page 91 STATUS AUDIO OFF ON ON 16 TEST OUT TEST OUT MARKER OFF ON OFF Selects whether or not the marker signal is mixed with the output signal from the TEST OUT connector TEST OUT VF DISP OFF ON OFF Selects whether or not the VF DISP display signal is mixed with the output signal from the TEST OUT connector TEST OUT MENU OFF ON OFF Selects whether or not the MENU display signal is mixed with the output signal from the TEST OUT connector TEST OUT ZEBRA OFF ON OFF Selects whether or not the ZEBRA display signal is mixed with the output signal from the TEST OUT connector OUTPUT SELECT Y R G B Y Select the output signal from the TEST OUT connector the input signal to the viewfinder and the output signal from the VBS SDI OUT 17 OFFSET OFFSET WHITE lt A gt OFF ON OFF See 5 3 4 Specifying an WHT Offset for the Auto White WARM COOL lt A gt Display color 3200 sr ip temperature Balance Setting on page 95 WARM COOL BAL lt A gt 99 to 99 0 OFFSET WHITE lt B gt OFF ON OFF WARM COOL lt B gt Display color 3200 temperature WARM COOL BAL lt B gt 99 to 99 0 Menu List sexipueddy 145 sexipueddy 146 USER No Page Item Settings Default Description menu 18 SHT ENABLE SHUTTER ECS OFF ON ON See 4 2 Setting the SHUTTER 1 32 OFF ON ON Boone Shutt
117. SELECT Y R G B Y Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector the input signal to the viewfinder and the output signal from the VBS SDI OUT M04 SD LEVEL SD VBS LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the V level of the VBS output signal ADJ SD VBS SETUP 0 to 7 5 0 Selects the setup level of the VBS output LVL signal M05 BATTERY BEFORE END 1 5 10 15 to 95 100 5 Used when a Sony made battery pack such in 5 steps as a BP GL65 GL95 is used Sets the voltage warning level just before the battery ends END 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 Used when a Sony made battery pack such as a BP GL65 GL95 is used Sets the voltage level at which the battery ends and the camcorder stops operation just before the battery ends BEFORE END 2 11 0 to 17 0 V 11 3 Used when a Sony made battery pack such in 0 1 V steps as a BP L60S is used Sets the voltage warning level just before the battery ends END 2 10 5 to 11 5 V 11 0 Used when a Sony made battery pack such in 0 1 V steps as BP L60S is used Sets the voltage level at which the battery ends and the camcorder stops operation just before the battery ends BEFORE END 3 11 0 to 17 0 V 11 8 Used when a battery pack other than a Sony in 0 1 V steps made one or an external power connected to the DC IN connector is used Sets the voltage warning level just before the battery ends END 3 10 5 to 14 0 V 11 0 Used when a battery pack other than a Sony in 0 1 V steps
118. SONY HD CAMCORDER HDW F900R td ele File OA Memory STICK w OPERATION MANUAL 1st Edition 2 To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture To avoid electrical shock do not open the cabinet Refer servicing to qualified personnel only For the customers in the U S A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help You are cautioned that any changes or mod
119. Stick enables you to save user files scene files lens files reference files and ALL files The camcorder menu system allows you to make a setting so that when a Memory Stick holding these files is inserted while in menu operating mode a menu page relating to the desired file is automatically displayed on the screen This enables you to proceed to file operations quickly This is very convenient especially when you manage data files using Memory Sticks The page to be displayed can be selected on the MEMORY STICK page of the FILE menu 1 In the TOP menu select the FILE menu 2 Turn the MENU knob until the MEMORY STICK page of the FILE menu appears then push the MENU knob to select the page Alternatively on the CONTENTS page select MEMORY STICK 10 MEMORY STICK M S FORMAT 3 gt EXEC M S IN gt JUMP TO OFF 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to M S IN gt JUMP TO then push the MENU knob The mark on the left of M S IN gt JUMP TO changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 4 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting target FILE menu page Setting Description OFF Disables this function USER Jumps to the USER FILE page ALL Jumps to the ALL FILE page SCENE Jumps to the SCENE FILE page LENS Jumps to the LENS FILE 1 page REFER Jumps to the REFERENCE page USER1 Jumps to the USER 1 page 5 Pus
120. T BEEP OFF LCD DISPLAY HOLD TIMER LCD HOLD TIMER 1H SHOT TIME DISP The mark on the left of STB Y OFF TIMER changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 3 Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the desired STB Y OFF TIMER appears When you turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise STB Y OFF TIMER changes in the following sequence 60MIN gt 30MIN gt 10MIN lt gt 5MIN lt gt OFF In order not to enter in the VTR SAVE mode select OFF To enter the VTR SAVE mode select the desired time 4 Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of STB Y OFF TIMER returns to an mark and the mark to the left of the setting returns to the mark 5 Toend menu operations set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Setting the Stand by off Timer During Rec Pause Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4 1 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance To ensure excellent image quality when using this camcorder conditions may require that both the black balance and the white balance be adjusted Black balance adjustment The black balance requires adjustment in the following cases e When the camcorder is used for the first time e When the camcorder has not been used for a long time e When the camcorder is used under conditions in which the surrounding temperature has changed greatly e When the GAIN selector L M H values have been cha
121. TAKE function that allows the camcorder to search for the cut most recently recorded and records the new cut over it ATW Assigns the ON OFF function of auto tracing white balance RETURN Assigns the ON OFF function for VIDEO displaying the image of the return video signal on the viewfinder 2 LENS RET Assigns the same function as that of the RET button on the lens REC SWITCH Assigns the VTR S S start stop function Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item you want to assign to the assignable switch then push the MENU knob The setting is executed and the FUNCTION 1 page appears again Adjustments and Settings from Menus 97 sbumes p eeq pue sfejdsiq nue g Je deyo HAI 98 To continue to assign a function to another assignable switch Repeat steps 3 and 4 5 Toend the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF To return to the FUNCTION 1 page Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to ESC at the top right of the window then push the MENU knob Operation of the assignable switches when UA01 to UA10 are assigned The following shows an example of how to use the assignable switch to which the function registered in UAO1 to UA10 on the ASSIGN EDIT page has been assigned In the following example the FAN ON OFF function on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is assigned T Push the corresponding assignable switch The item and the current setting are displayed on the v
122. TPUT SELECT e Shutter speed settings made in the standard mode and ECS mode The white balance data can be loaded only when the SCENE WHITE DATA setting on the REFERENCE page of the FILE menu is ON 6 2 1 Saving a Scene File To save a scene file in the Memory Stick insert the Memory Stick before starting the operation 1 In the TOP menu select the FILE menu 2 Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE FILE page appears then push the MENU knob to select the page Alternatively select SCENE FILE on the CONTENTS page to display the SCENE FILE page SCENE FILE page O4OSCENE FILE TOP 901 Q000000000000000 02 O000000000000000 03 O00000000000000g 04 QOQDOOOUU000000000 OOOOO00000000ooo OS OSTANDARD SCENE RECALL SCENE STORE F ID EXEC EXEC If you want to set a file ID for the data to be saved Set the file ID before going to step 3 For details on setting the file ID see Setting the file ID on page 112 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to SCENE STORE then push the MENU knob O4OSCENE FILE TOP QODOOOUQO00000000 QOOOOOOOO0000000R QOOOOUO0000000000 QODOOGOQO00000000 05 QOQO000000000000 OSTANDARD SCENE RECALL PECENE STORE EXEC EXEC The SCENE STORE page appears P00 SCENE STORE DISPLAY MODE MEM 1 MEM 5 4 Select the desired file number When no Memory Stick has been inserted Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desi
123. There are two memories for each filter allowing a total of eight adjustments to be stored When this switch is set to A or B the camcorder automatically adjusts itself to the stored value corresponding to the current settings of this switch and the FILTER selector You can use the AUTO W B BAL switch even when ATW is in use 1 ATW Auto Tracing White Balance The white balance of the picture being shot is adjusted automatically for varying lighting conditions B ATW When this switch is set to B and on the FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu WHITE SWITCH lt B gt page 142 is set to ATW ATW is activated When this switch is adjusted the new setting appears on the setting change adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds You can assign the ATW ON OFF function to the ASSIGN 1 switch push button on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu For details see 5 3 5 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches on page 96 TURBO GAIN button When shooting under extremely poor lighting conditions press the button once to boost the video gain to the value preset on the GAIN SW page of the USER menu up to 42 dB To stop boosting the gain press the button once more The gain is reset to the original gain You can assign the desired function to this TURBO GAIN button like the ASSIGN 1 switch on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu For details see 5 3 5 Assigning Functio
124. This window allows you to confirm the following items related to audio e ON OFF of EMPHASIS setting criteria for DF NDF and FRONT MIC MONO STEREO e Type of input signal input to audio channels CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 e Input level of audio channels CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 You can use the SET STATUS page of the USER menu to set whether or not the status confirmation windows are displayed Displaying the status confirmation windows You can use the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch as the STATUS ON SEL OFF switch when the MENU ON OFF switch is set to OFF when the cover of the menu operating section is closed OFF is automatically selected By pushing the STATUS ON SEL OFF switch up to ON SEL the confirmation window appears Each time you push this switch up to ON SEL the window switches After 10 seconds the window disappears automatically To make the window disappear promptly after displaying the window push this switch down to OFF Disabling display of the status confirmation windows T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen 91 sBules pelrejeq pue skejdsiq nuaw g Je deyo A sbumes paliejeq pue s ejds q nue g Je deyo HAI 92 The menu page accessed last appears on the viewfinder screen Turn the MENU knob until the SET STATUS page appears then push the MENU knob to select the page The current setting of each item appears on the right of the item 130SET STATUS
125. U knob When the MAINTENANCE menu is used for the first time the CONTENTS page appears bet ipa eal WHT SHADING BLK SHADING LEVEL ADJ SD_ LEVEL ADJ BATTERY AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 TIME CODE VTR MODE Or if you have used the MAINTENANCE menu before the page that was on the screen when the last MAINTENANCE menu operation ended appears 3 When the CONTENTS page is displayed push the MENU knob once and then turn the MENU knob to move the mark to SHOT MARKER Or turn the MENU knob until SHOT MARKER appears from the CONTENTS page Recording yoeghe q pue Bulpiooay g Jajdeyup HH Mh yoeghe q pue Bulpiovey E Ja deyo HAM When any page of the MAINTENANCE menu is displayed turn the MENU knob until the SHOT MARKER page appears 110SHOT MARKER LTC UB MARKER REC_START MARK SHOT MARKER 1 SHOT MARKER 2 Push the MENU knob The mark moves to the currently selected item and a mark appears on the left of the setting Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to LTC UB MARKER 11OSHOT MARKER LTC UB MARKER SET REC START MARK FF SHOT MARKER 1 SHOT MARKER 2 Push the MENU knob The mark at the left of LTC UB MARKER changes to a mark and the mark at the left of the setting changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the desired setting appears The setting changes in the order of SET ALL gt OFF 110SHOT MARKER LTC
126. UB MARKER REC_START_ MARK SHOT MARKER 1 SHOT MARKER 2 Item Contents SET Determines whether or not marks are recorded for the items REC START MARK SHOT MARKER 1 and SHOT MARKER 2 which appear when you select SET ALL Records the recording start mark good shot mark 1 and good shot mark 2 OFF Does not record any markers When you select SET go to step 8 When you select ALL or OFF go to step 9 Recording 8 Set the mark s to be recorded to ON Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to the mark to be set then push the MENU knob 11O0SHOT MARKER LTC UB MARKER OT SHOT MARKER 2 Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the desired setting appears To record the mark on the tape select ON To not record the mark select OFF Push the MENU knob To set the remaining marks repeat steps and 3 9 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Or close the switch cover The menu display disappears from the viewfinder screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the viewfinder Recording a shot mark 1 Press the RET button once On the viewfinder screen and the time code of the marked point are displayed for about 3 seconds Recording a shot mark 2 Press the RET button twice On the viewfinder screen X and the time code of the marked point are disp
127. ach the CAC 12 Microphone Holder once you have attached it to the camcorder be careful not to lose the two screws fixing the CAC 12 After detaching the CAC 12 be sure to put the two screws back into their original places see the figure illustrating the step 1 operation 7 5 3 Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner for a UHF Wireless Microphone System To use a Sony UHF wireless microphone system attach one of the following UHF portable tuners e WRR 855A 855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit e WRR 861A 861B 862A 862B UHF Portable Tuner For each of these UHF portable tuners use the following attachment procedure For details refer to the UHF portable tuner manual Fitting the WRR 855A 855B You can use the WRR 855A 855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit simply by inserting it into the slot in the camcorder and fastening the fixing screws Undo the four fixing screws holding the cover of the slot and remove the cover 2 Insert the WRR 855A 855B and fasten the four fixing Screws Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 switches for the desired audio recording channel to WIRELESS or W For the operation of the WRR 855A 855B refer to the manual supplied with the WRR 855A 855B Fitting the WRR 861 A 861B 862A 862B with a battery pack 1 1 Attach the WRR tuner fitting not supplied service part number A 8278 057 A to the back of the camcorder Use a Phillips type screwdriver to tighten
128. ack 2 Set the POWER switch to ON and check that the HUMID indicator does not appear and that the battery power level is sufficient If the HUMID indicator appears wait until it disappears 3 Check that there are no obstructions near the cassette lid then push the EJECT button to open the cassette lid 4 After checking the points below load the cassette and close the cassette lid e The cassette is not write protected e There is no slack in the tape e Condensation does not form in the tape Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting Chapter Condensation If you move the camcorder from a very cold place to a warm place or use it in a damp location condensation may form on the head drum Then if the camcorder is operated in this state the tape may adhere to the drum and cause a failure or even permanent damage Do the following to prevent this from happening e When moving the camcorder from a cold place to a warm place be sure no cassette is loaded in the camcorder e Whenever you turn on the power check that the HUMID indicator does not appear If it appears wait until it disappears before loading a cassette For more information see 3 1 1 Loading and Unloading a Cassette on page 35 and 8 3 Operation Warnings on page 135 8 1 2 Testing the Camera Set the switches and selectors as follows Iris Automatic J Zoom SERVO MAN WHITE BAL A or B VTR SAVE STBY SAV
129. al memory REFERENCE CLEAR EXEC Clears the reference file REFERENCE LOAD EXEC Loads the reference file REFERENCE SAVE EXEC Saves the reference file to a Memory Stick F ID 16 characters To name the reference file SCENE WHITE DATA OFF ON OFF See White balance setting data to be saved in the scene file on page 111 FO6 USER USER GAMMA LOAD EXEC Copies the user gamma file stored in the GAMMA Memory Stick into the internal memory USER GAMMA RESET EXEC Clears the user gamma data stored in the internal memory F ID Display only Name of the user gamma data stored in the internal memory F ID2 Display only Name of the user gamma data stored in the Memory Stick DATE2 Display only Creation date of the user gamma data stored in the Memory Stick FO7 LENS FILE 1 LENS FILE RECALL EXEC Loads lens files LENS FILE STORE EXEC Saves lens files F ID 16 characters To name lens files SOURCE MEMORY1 Number of selected lens file LENS NO OFFSET EXEC To clear lens files LENS AUTO RECALL OFF ON ON Turns the automatic recall function for serial lens on and off L ID Display only To show the lens specific ID when a serial lens is connected L MF Display only To show the name of the lens manufacturer when a serial lens is connected F08 LENSFILE2 LENS MVMOD 99 to 99 0 For lens file V Saw shading LENS CENTER H 480 to 479 0 For the
130. alue of the auto iris adjustment is other than the standard value FORMAT Frame frequency 59 94i 50i 23 98PsF 24PsF 25PsF or 29 97PSF 1 The SLS mode is effective only when an optional HKDW 905R extension board is installed 2 Depending on the frame frequency currently selected For details see 4 2 1 Shutter Modes on page 62 T Perform the settings for each item Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to the item you want to set then push the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob to change the setting then push the MENU knob To continue setting other items repeat steps and 8 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF When you change the settings only on the LED page The LED page is also registered in the USER menu You can access this page without opening the TOP page Open the USER menu by pressing the MENU ON OFF switch and display this page from the USER menu Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The menu page accessed last appears on the viewfinder screen Turn the MENU knob until the MARKER 1 page appears then push the MENU knob to select the page The current setting of each item appears on the right of the item O8OMARKER 1 MARKER CENTER CENTER SAFETY SAFETY ASPECT ASPECT SELECT ASPECT MASK LU
131. amcorder to store up to 64 frames The slow shutter function is useful not only for shooting in extremely dark conditions without noise but also for shooting moving objects with a special afterimage effect Image inversion function Installing an optional HKDW 905R extension board which has an anti image inversion function allows you to cancel the image inversion phenomena that occurs when a cine lens converter is used The slow shutter and image inversion functions of the optional HKDW 905R extension board cannot be used at the same time Remote control connectors By connecting an optional RM B150 B750 or similar remote control unit you can control the camera settings of the camcorder externally 1 1 2 VTR Features HDCAM format e Use of the HDCAM format allows high performance HD digital recording and playback while preserving the same ease of use as conventional camcorder equipment The same cassette size S size as Digital Betacam can be used to achieve the following long recording times For 30 frames 59 941 and 29 97PsF Approximately 40 minutes For 25 frames 50i and 25PsF Approximately 48 minutes For 24 frames 24PsF and 23 98PsF Approximately 50 minutes Time Code operations e LTC and VITC recording and LTC playback are available e The built in time code generator can be synchronized with an external generator e A lithium battery provides the back up power supply for the built in time code g
132. an optional HKDW 702 902R is installed M16 GENLOCK GENLOCK OFF ON ON Turns genlock on and off RETURN VIDEO OFF ON OFF Turns return video on and off 2 GL H PHASE 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the genlock H phase gt COASE 3 GL H PHASE FINE 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the genlock H phase a Oo M17 ND COMP ND OFFSET OFF ON Turns the mode which sets ND neutral a ADJUST density filter color compensation values on and off CLEAR ND EXEC Clears ND filter color compensation values OFFSET M18 FORMAT CURRENT Display only Displays the currently selected frame frequency NEXT 59 94 50i 23 98 23 98 Selects the frame frequency The selected 24PsF 25PsF frame frequency becomes effective after the 29 97 power is turned off and then on again Menu List 159 No Page Item Settings Default Description M19 VANC RX UMID LINE1 0 9 to 20 0 Selects the line on which the UMID is to be recorded First field When 0 is selected the UMID is not recorded UMID LINE2 0 564 to 593 0 Selects the line on which the UMID is to be recorded Second field When 0 is selected the UMID is not recorded 1 When Y is selected in the camcorder with an optional HKDW 702 902R the color signal is output from the connector whose selected output signal is an SD signal 2 When an optional HKDW 702 902R is installed the HD SDI OUT connector located on the side of the camcorder can b
133. aptive three dimensional Audio with standard playback machine Frequency response 20 Hz to 20 kHz 0 5 0 8 dB Dynamic range 85 dB min emphasis ON Distortion THD 0 08 max Cross talk 70 dB max Wow and flutter Below measurable limit Specifications Input output connectors Signal inputs AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 XLR type 3 pin female 60 dBu 50 dBu 40 dBu 4 dBu AES EBU 0 dBu 0 775 Vrms MIC IN XLR type 5 pin female 60 dBu 50 dBu 40 dBu LPF ON GENLOCK IN BNC type 1 0 Vp p 75 Q unbalanced TC IN BNC type 0 5 V to 18 Vp p 10k Q Signal outputs TEST OUT BNC type 1 0 Vp p 75 Q unbalanced HD SDI OUT BNC type 0 8 Vp p 75 Q unbalanced AUDIO OUT XLR type 5 pin male 0 dBm TC OUT BNC type 1 0 Vp p 75 Q EARPHONE minijack 8 Q co to 18 dBs variable Others DC IN XLR type 4 pin male 11 to 17 V DC DC OUT 4 pin female 11 to 17 V DC maximum rated current 0 1 A LENS 12 pin REMOTE 8 pin Recommended Additional Equipment Viewfinder HDVF 20A HD Electronic Viewfinder HDVF C30W HD Electronic Viewfinder Power supply and related equipment BP GL65 GL95 L60S Battery Pack BC L70 M150 Battery Charger AC DN10 AC Adaptor HDCAM cassette tapes BCT 6HD 12HD 22HD 32HD 40HD Memory label MLB IM 100 Viewfinder and related equipment BKW 401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket Fog proof filter Part No 1 547 341 11 Lens assembly farsighted Part No A 8262 537 A Lens assembly lo
134. ar strong magnetic fields e Indirect sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods To prevent electromagnetic interference from portable communications devices The use of portable telephones and other communications devices near this unit can result in malfunctions and interference with audio and video signals It is recommended that the portable communications devices near this unit be powered off Note on laser beams Laser beams may damage the CCDs If you shoot a scene that includes a laser beam be careful not to let the laser beam be directed into the lens of the camera 1 4 Using the CD ROM Manual The supplied CD ROM includes versions of the Operation Manual for the HDW F9OOR in English and Japanese in PDF format 1 4 1 Preparations The following program must be installed on your computer in order to read the operation manuals contained on the CD ROM e Adobe Reader Version 6 0 or higher Memo If Adobe Reader is not installed you can download it from the following URL http Awww adobe com Adobe and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries 1 4 2 Reading the CD ROM Manual To read the operation manual contained on the CD ROM do the following 1 Insert the CD ROM in your CD ROM drive A cover page appears automatically in your browser If it does not appear automatically in the browser double click on the index htm file on the C
135. arnings on page 135 When HD SDI REMOTE I F page 159 is set to R TLY on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu this indicator lights in red while the HDW 250 S280 connected to the HD SDI OUT connector is recording even when a cassette is not loaded in the camcorder BATT battery indicator Starts flashing when power level of the battery connected to the camcorder has been reduced and stays lit when the battery is exhausted Indicators in the Viewfinder To prevent interruption during operation replace the battery as soon as this indicator starts flashing The level at which the indicator starts flashing can be set on the BATTERY page page 153 of the MAINTENANCE menu 4 warning indicator Lights up when the camcorder is used under one or more of the following conditions and if the corresponding items have been set to ON on the LED page of the USER menu The gain is set to anything but 0 dB The SHUTTER selector is ON The WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST The 5600K mode is set to ON ATW is being used The lens extender is being used The FILTER selector is set to anything but ND 1 CC B The reference value of the auto iris adjustment is anything but the standard value The frame frequency is set to a frequency other than 23 98PsF You can change the criteria for whether indicator lights or does not light on the LED STD page of the USER menu For details see 5 2 4 Selecting
136. ay ZEBRA2 DET LVL Adjusts the level of the zebra 2 factory setting 100 display ASPECT Selects the viewfinder aspect ratio VF DETAIL LEVEL Adjusts the sharpness of the viewfinder 2 Turns the VF detail function on or off and adjusts the level 99 to 99 VF DTL H LEVEL Adjusts the VF H detail level 99 to 99 VF DTL V LEVEL Adjusts the VF V detail level 99 to 99 1 When you use a viewfinder that is not equipped with a ZEBRA switch turn the display on or off using this item When you use a viewfinder with a ZEBRA switch the most recent operation of the ZEBRA switch and this menu operation will be effective 2 The sharpness setting at the viewfinder does not affect the recorded image 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item you want to set then push the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 4 Tur the MENU knob to change the setting then push the MENU knob The mark returns to a mark and the mark returns to a mark 5 To continue setting other items repeat steps 3 and 4 6 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF 5 2 7 Recording Shot Data Superimposed on the Color Bars The SHOT DISP page of the USER menu allows you to select which shot data is recorded superimposed on the color bars You can also select whi
137. balance without the use of any tools Function extension interface and optional boards An extension connector can be attached to the battery attachment on the rear panel Use of the following optional boards permits you to expand the existing functions e HKDW 702 Down Converter Board e HKDW 703 Picture Cache Board e HKDW 902R 2 3 Pull Down Down Converter Board e HKDW 905R Slow Shutter and Image Inverter Board Features 13 nea A MOIABAQ Ja deuD HAI 14 1 2 Example of System Configuration The diagram below shows a typical configuration of the camcorder for ENG and EFP In this manual an optional HDVF 20A HD Electronic Viewfinder is used to instruct how to operate the unit For more information about the fittings connections or use of additional equipment and accessories see Chapter 7 Setting Up the Camcorder as well as the operation manuals for the connected equipment Viewfinder related equipment Name Purpose Magnification Part No Lens assembly 2 8Dto 2 0D A 8262 537 A Lens assembly 3 6 D to 0 8 D A 8262 538 A Lens assembly 3 6 D to 0 4D A 8267 737 A Lens assembly 2 4 D to 0 5 D A 8314 798 A 3 x magnification BKW 401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket _ AC power supply Product Model name m AC Adaptor AC DN10 Battery Product Model name __ Battery Charger BC L70 M150 Battery Pack BP GL65 GL95 L60S
138. battery contact your nearest Sony dealer 3 For detailed information on how to unload the cassette manually see Unloading a cassette manually manual eject on page 36 Operation Warnings 4 For detailed information on the full top sensor refer to the Maintenance Manual 5 To replace the full top sensor contact your nearest Sony dealer Phenomena specific to CCD image sensors The following phenomena that may appear in images are specific to CCD Charge Coupled Device image sensors They do not indicate malfunctions White flecks Although the CCD image sensors are produced with high precision technologies fine white flecks may be generated on the screen in rare cases caused by cosmic rays etc This is related to the principle of CCD image sensors and is not a malfunction The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the following cases e when operating at a high environmental temperature e when you have raised the master gain sensitivity e when operating in Slow Shutter mode This product has a compensation function and the phenomena may be improved by performing automatic adjustment of the black balance see page 59 Vertical smear When an extremely bright object such as a strong spotlight or flashlight is being shot vertical tails may be produced on the screen or the image may be distorted Vertical tails shown on the image Monitor screen Bright object e g strong spotlight
139. camcorder is compatible with the Tele File Memory Label system When you press the RET button on the lens while recording the time code valid when you pressed the button is recorded on an optional MLB 1M 100 memory label attached to the cassette This is very helpful for management of cassette tapes and to improve the efficiency of tape editing 1 Tele File The Tele File system is a non contact data reading writing system that allows data about recorded material to be stored on a tape label with a non contact IC memory 1 1 3 Other Features HD SDI output connectors Two HD SDI Embedded Audio output connectors allow you to monitor camera and playback images without attaching a camera adaptor Audio functions The MIC IN microphone input connector XLR type 5 pin female allows you to connect the supplied stereo microphone You can record either stereo or monaural sound An optional slot in UHF portable tuner WRR 855A 855B can be attached The two AUDIO IN connectors XLR type 3 pin on the rear panel can be switched to line input microphone input or 48V external power and also to AES EBU digital audio inputs Four channels of 20 bit digital audio can be recorded The AUDIO OUT connector XLR 5 pin allows the camcorder to output signals as stereo audio Proper balancing design The camcorder features a new shoulder pad system that enables you to adjust the front to rear direction position to ensure proper
140. ch as thinner Disassembling the eyepiece for cleaning 1 SS dot Viewfinder Eyecup Protecting Packing Eyecup barrel holder filter ring 3 T Detach the eyepiece from the viewfinder barrel For the detaching procedure see 7 2 4 Detaching the Eyepiece on page 119 Maintenance 2 Remove the eyecup from the eyecup holder 3 Remove the protecting filter together with the packing ring from inside the eyecup holder 4 Detach the protecting filter from the packing ring Fog proof filter Depending on the temperature and humidity the protecting filter may mist because of vapor or your breath To ensure that the viewfinder is always clear replace the protecting filter with a fog proof filter Part No 1 547 341 11 not supplied Fitting the fog proof filter Replace the protecting filter on the packing with the fog proof filter Be sure to correctly assemble the fog proof filter the packing and the eyecup so that the reassembled eyepiece is waterproof When cleaning the fog proof filter wipe it very gently with a soft cloth to avoid damaging the anti fogging coating 8 3 Operation Warnings When a problem occurs at power on or during operation a warning is given by the relevant indicators in the display Operation warnings panel in the viewfinder and on the camcorder body The speaker and earphone also give audible warnings
141. ch of the shot IDs 1 to 4 set in the SHOT DISP page is recorded superimposed on the picture CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The menu page accessed last appears on the viewfinder screen 2 Turn the MENU knob until the SHOT DISP page appears then push the MENU knob to select the page The current setting of each item appears on the right of the item 11OSHOT DISP DATE TIME MODEL NAME SERIAL NO ID SEL BLINK CHARA Item Description SHOT DATE Selects whether or not the shot date is superimposed ON or OFF SHOT TIME Selects whether or not shot time is superimposed ON or OFF SHOT MODEL Selects whether or not the model name NAME is superimposed ON or OFF SHOT SERIAL Selects whether or not the serial NO number is superimposed ON or OFF SHOT ID SEL Selects whether or not the shot ID set on the SHOT ID page is superimposed 1 to 4 or OFF SHOT BLINK Selects whether or not a blinking is CHARA superimposed ON or OFF 1 To carry out superimposed recording select the SHOT ID number 1 to 4 To record without superimposing the SHOT ID select OFF 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item you want to set then push MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 4 Tu
142. compensation for the lens file F10 MEMORY M S FORMAT EXEC Formats a Memory Stick STICK M S IN gt JUMP TO OFF USER OFF See 6 3 Jumping to a File Related Menu Page ALL SCENE When Inserting a Memory Stick on page LENS REFER 114 USER1 F11 TELE FILE TELE FILE CLEAR EXEC See 3 4 Recording the Recording Start Time TELE FILE MARK OK NG KP OK Code onto the Memory Label Tele File on page 53 ID 20 characters SIZE 0 to 9999 KBYTE REMAIN 0 to 100 STATUS STANDBY NO Displays the status under which the Tele File LABEL mark function is to be used WRITE PROTECT UNKNOWN FORMAT UNFORMAT MEMORY FULL NEAR FULL 1 This USER FILE page has been also registered in the USER menu at the factory This you can access this page without accessing the TOP menu 2 Displays only when a Memory Stick in which user gamma files are stored is inserted 3 When Y is selected in the camcorder with an optional HKDW 702 902R the color signal is output from the connector whose selected output signal is an SD signal 4 When an optional HKDW 702 902R is installed the HD SDI OUT connector located on the side of the camcorder can be used as the VBS SDI output connector Menu List sexipueddy 163 sexipueddy 164 DIAGNOSIS Menu The following table lists and describes the items in the DIAGNOSIS menu No Page Item D01 HOURS METER RESET METER Description Reset
143. ctronic 5600K filter on off P03 BLACK FLARE MASTER BLACK 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the master black level R BLACK 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the R black level B BLACK 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the B black level gt MASTER FLARE 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the flare level of the master 3 R FLARE 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the R flare level x G FLARE 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the G flare level B FLARE 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the B flare level FLARE OFF ON ON Turns the flare correction circuit on off OUTPUT SELECT Y R G B Y Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector the input signal to the viewfinder and the output signal from the VBS SDI OUT Menu List 147 sexipueddy 148 No Page Item Settings Default Description P04 GAMMA GAMMA OFF ON ON Turns the gamma correction function on off STEP GAMMA 0 35 to 0 90 0 45 Sets the master gamma correction curve in steps MASTER GAMMA 99 to 99 0 Sets the master gamma correction curve R GAMMA 99 to 99 0 Sets the R gamma correction curve G GAMMA 99 to 99 0 Sets the G gamma correction curve B GAMMA 99 to 99 0 Sets the B gamma correction curve OUTPUT SELECT Y R G B Y Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector the input signal to the viewfinder and the output signal from the VBS SDI OUT GAMMA SELECT STD HG USER STD Sele
144. cts the gamma table GAM SEL STD 1to4 3 Selects the gamma table of STD GAM SEL HG 1to4 4 Selects the hyper gamma table of hyper gamma GAM SEL USER 1to5 1 Selects the gamma table loaded from the Memory Stick PO5 BLACK GAMMA BLACK GAMMA OFF ON OFF Turns the black gamma correction on off BLACK GAM RANGE_ LOW L MID HIGH Sets the range affected by black gamma H MID HIGH MASTER BLK 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the master black gamma GAMMA R BLACK GAMMA 99 to 99 0 Sets the correction curve of the R black gamma G BLACK GAMMA 99 to 99 0 Sets the correction curve of the G black gamma B BLACK GAMMA 99 to 99 0 Sets the correction curve of the B black gamma OUTPUT SELECT Y R G B Y Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector the input signal to the viewfinder and the output signal from the VBS SDI OUT POG KNEE KNEE OFF ON ON Turns the knee correction circuit on off KNEE POINT M 50 0 to 109 0 95 0 Sets the master knee point level KNEE SLOPE M 99 to 99 0 Set the master knee slope level WHITE CLIP OFF ON ON Turns the white clipping function on off WHITE CLIP LEVEL 100 0to 109 5 499 93 Adjusts the white clipping level KNEE SATURATION OFF ON ON Turns the knee saturation function on off KNEE SAT LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Sets the knee saturation level P07 KNEE 2 KNEE SATURATION OFF ON OFF Turns the knee saturation function on off KNEE POINT R 45 0 to 14 0 0 0 Sets the R kne
145. d before the page accessed last appears If the CONTENTS page is displayed push the MENU knob once and then turn the MENU knob to move the mark to SHT ENABLE then push the MENU knob to display the SHT ENABLE page If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the SHT ENABLE page appears then push the MENU knob to select the page The current setting of each item appears to the right of the item 18OSHT ENABLE SHU SHUT SHU SHU SHU SHU SHU SHU SHU ani am a en a a a ai TTT e e Ta a i ea wn Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the shutter mode or shutter speed you want then push the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob until ON appears then push the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item returns to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting returns to a mark To set another mode or speed return to step 5 Note that only the shutter speeds set to ON can be selected with the SHUTTER selector To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Setting the Electronic Shutter 65 Bulpiooey 104 suas pue sjuewsnipy Jeldeyo 1h Bulpsooey 10 sumes pue sjuswjsnipy y 13 dey9 HAI 66 The menu display disappears from the viewfinder screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears on the vie
146. d external battery to the DC IN connector then change the internal battery e When an internal battery pack is loaded and an external battery is connected to the DC IN connector the external battery is always used as the power source e There may be some noise on the video signal at the instant the power sources are switched 7 1 3 Using an AC Adaptor Mount the AC DN10 on the camcorder in the same way as a battery pack then connect to the AC power supply The AC DN10 can supply up to 100 W of power to an AC power source 7 1 4 Using the Anton Bauer Ultralight System By fitting the camcorder with the Anton Bauer Ultralight system and setting the LIGHT switch to AUTO you can switch the light on and off automatically as you start and stop VTR operation This system operates with lights powered by 12 V with a maximum power consumption of 50 W 7 2 Adjusting the Viewfinder For maximum viewing convenience you can adjust the viewfinder position in the left right and backward forward directions 7 2 1 Adjusting the Viewfinder Position Adjusting the position to the right or left aN 1 Loosen the viewfinder left right positioning ring 2 Adjust the viewfinder to the most convenient position for viewing by sliding it to the right or left 3 Tighten the viewfinder left right positioning
147. ded Audio signals to be recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 Adjusting the audio recording level wa When 1 and 2 are displayed under the audio channel level meters the CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 switch is set to CH 1 2 Set this switch to CH 3 4 You can adjust the input level of audio channels CH 3 and CH 4 by using the AUDIO SELECT CH3 AUDIO SELECT CH4 LVL CONTROL CH3 and LVL CONTROL 4 items on the AUDIO 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON while pushing the MENU knob The TOP menu appears 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to MAINTENANCE then push the MENU knob When the MAINTENANCE menu is used for the first time the CONTENTS page appears Or if you have used the MAINTENANCE menu before the page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended appears 3 When the CONTENTS page is displayed push the MENU knob once and then turn the MENU knob to move the mark to AUDIO 3 then push the MENU knob again When any page of the MAINTENANCE menu is displayed turn the MENU knob until the AUDIO 3 page appears then push the MENU knob The AUDIO 3 page appears 07 AUDIO 3 AU SG 1KHz REART WRR LEVEL REAR2 WRR LEVEL SIDE2 AUDIO SELECT CH3 AUTO AUDIO SELECT CH4 AUTO LUL CONTROL CH3 70 LUL CONTROL CH4 70 Select the method to be used to adjust the audio input level of audio channels CH 3 and CH 4 To adjust the audio input level au
148. der memory when the Memory Stick is inserted return to the SCENE RECALL display and load the desired scene file in the camcorder memory When there is no file to be loaded shown as NO FILE an existing file of the same number is unaffected In the example shown in step 3 MEM 3 is not overwritten 6 2 3 Resetting the Camcorder Settings to the Standard Settings Saved in the Reference File You can reset the settings of the camcorder to the settings saved in the reference file standard settings For details about the items in the reference file refer to the Maintenance Manual 1 After displaying the SCENE FILE page turn the MENU knob to move the mark to STANDARD then push the MENU knob O4OSCENE FILE SCENE 25 O5 ESTANDARD SCENE RECALL D EXEC SCENE STORE EXEC F 1D SCENE21 The O displayed on the left of STANDARD changes to W The settings of the camcorder are reset to the settings saved in the reference file Saving and Loading Scene Files eq Buljes esp Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 9 Jajdeyo hhh 113 eyeq Buijes sn Bulpeo pue Bulaeg 9 Jaydeyo HAI 114 To cancel resetting Push the MENU knob again while ll is displayed The operation is cancelled and the camcorder returns to the settings before STANDARD was selected Jumping to a File Related Menu Page When Inserting a Memory Stick 6 3 Jumping to a File Related Menu Page When Inserting a Memory Stick A Memory
149. der screen in display mode 2 or 3 The white balance adjustment ends in about second with the message shown in the following figure The adjustment setting is automatically stored in the memory A or B that was selected in step 1 using the WHITE BAL switch Approximate color temperature of the subject If the camera has a zoom lens with an automatic iris the iris may hunt 1 during the adjustment To prevent this adjust the iris gain knob indicated as IG IS or S on the lens 1 Hunting Repeated brightening and darkening of the image resulting from repeated response to automatic iris control For details refer to the lens operating manual of the lens If the automatic white balance adjustment cannot be made If the white balance adjustment cannot be completed normally an error message will appear for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen in display mode 2 or 3 Possible messages are listed below White balance adjustment error messages Error message Meaning AWB NG The white video level is too low LOW LEVEL Either open the lens iris or increase the gain AWB NG The color temperature is too high COLOR TEMP HIGH _ Select a suitable filter setting AWB NG The color temperature is too low COLOR TEMP LOW Select a suitable filter setting AWB NG Adjustment could not be completed TIME LIMIT within the standard number of attempts AWB NG The white area could
150. ding stops until the recording pause operation is completed about 1 second The message INVALID OPERATION is displayed In this case the RE TAKE function will be accepted when you perform the RE TAKE operation again after the message disappears 3 2 8 Searching for the Last Recorded Portion and Turning on Recording Pause Mode End Search Function The End Search function allows the camcorder to search for the end of the recording on the tape after the recorded portion is rewound and played back To use this function set the END SEARCH function to ON on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu For detailed information on menu operation see 5 1 2 Basic Menu Operations on page 76 Tape running direction P Recorded portion Blank portion The current tape position Searching for the end of the recorded portion and turning on recording pause mode END SEARCH function Searching for the end of the recording and turning on recording pause mode T Rewind the tape being recorded then push the PLAY button to start playback 2 Press the STOP button after checking the recorded image to turn in recording pause mode 3 Press the RET button on the lens The tape automatically runs and stops at the end of the recording The camcorder is in recording pause mode When the STOP KEY FREEZE function is set to become active on the VTR MODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu the picture is frozen once you pus
151. dsiq nuaw g Jeldey9 HMI sbumes paiejeq pue shejdsiq nue g Je deyo HAI 80 To add a page 1 Follow steps 1 2 and 3 in Adding a new page on page 78 to display the EDIT PAGE page of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu O1OEDIT PAGE t4 Add New Page 01 QUTPUT SEL 02 FUNCTION1 03 UF 04 05 l 06 71 07 08 09 UF_ SETTING 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to Add New Page then push the MENU knob The selection screen appears REMAIN PAGE ESC ee SELECT PAGE eee 1 2 3 4 5 6 Z 8 9 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired page then push the MENU knob The selected page is added to the last page of the USER menu To cancel adding a page Before pressing the MENU knob in step 3 turn the MENU knob to move the mark to ESC at the top right of the screen then push the MENU knob The EDIT PAGE screen appears again To delete a page 1 Follow steps 1 2 and 3 in Adding a new page on page 78 to display the EDIT PAGE page of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the page to be deleted 3 Push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to CANCEL PRST The message DELETE PAGE OK appears Menu Organization and Operation O1OEDIT PAGE DELETE PAGE OK ae New Page GAIN SW VF SETTING 4 Push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to CANCEL PRST again In the above example the VF DISP 2 page will be deleted To c
152. e 4 1 has been Adjusting the Black adjusted Balance and the White Balance on page 59 5 2 3 Display Modes and Setting Change Confirmation Adjustment Progress Messages You can limit or suppress the messages that give details of setting changes and adjustment progress and results by setting a display mode The conditions under which messages are displayed and their correspondence with the display mode are as follows Setting change confirmation adjustment progress messages and display modes Y Message is displayed N Message is not displayed Message Message Display display mode setting conditions 1 2 13 When the filter ND n CC m N N Y selection has where n 1 2 3 4 been changed m A B C D When the gain GAIN n where n N IN JY setting has been 3 dB 0 dB 3 dB 6 dB changed 9 dB 12 dB 18 dB 24 dB 30 dB 36 dB 42 dB When the WHITE n N IN JY setting of the where n A CH B CH WHITE BAL PRESET switch has been or ATW RUN changed When the DCC ON or OFF N IY JY OUTPUT DCC switch has been set to DCC ON or OFF 1 This is also displayed for about 3 seconds when the SHUTTER selector is set to ON 2 The shutter speed displayed depends on the selected frame frequency For details see 4 2 1 Shutter Modes on page 62 Changing the display mode You can change the display mode on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER men
153. e MENU knob set the MENU ON OFF switch from the OFF position to the ON position lt TOP MENU gt USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL e OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS Depending on the internal switch settings display of the TOP menu may be disabled For details ask your Sony service representative Submenus selected in the TOP menu The following menus can be selected from the TOP menu e USER menu This menu includes monitor output settings viewfinder settings and commonly used functions This menu is normally displayed when the MENU ON OFF switch is changed to ON e USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu This menu allows you to add pages to or delete pages from the USER menu to suit your needs You can add or delete menu items on the USER 1 to USER 19 pages Also you can add functions to be assigned to the assignable switches UAO1 to UA10 e ALL menu This menu contains all the items of the OPERATION menu PAINT menu MAINTENANCE menu FILE menu and DIAGNOSIS menu Menu Organization and Operation 75 sBules pelrejeq pue skejdsiq nuaw S Je deyo HHI sBuljes palrejeq pue sfejdsiq nuaw S Jeydeyo HAI 76 e OPERATION menu This menu contains items for changing settings according to conditions related to the subject when the camcorder is being operated e PAINT menu This menu contains items for making detailed image adjustments while using a waveform monitor to monitor the waveforms output by t
154. e Recording Start Time Code onto the Memory Label Tele File Even if you press the ASSIGN 1 switch when a Tele File mark is not displayed the Tele File mark set on the menu will not be displayed Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON while pushing the MENU knob The TOP menu appears lt TOP MENU gt USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to FILE then push the MENU knob When the FILE menu is used for the first time the CONTENTS page appears Or if you have used the FILE menu before the page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended appears 3 When the CONTENTS page is displayed push the MENU knob once and then turn the MENU knob to move the mark to TELE FILE then push the MENU knob again When any page of the FILE menu is displayed turn the MENU knob until the TELE FILE page appears then push the MENU knob The TELE FILE page appears 11 TELE FILE TOP TELE FILE CLEAR EXEC TELE FILE MARK OK ID SIZE 1KBYTE REMAIN 100 STATUS STANBY 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to TELE FILE MARK then push the MENU knob J1OTELE FILE TELE FILE CLEAR TELE FILE MARK ID TOP _ EXEC T OK SIZE REMAIN STATUS 1KBYTE 100 STANBY The mark to the left of TELE FILE MARK changes to a mark and the mark to the left of the setting changes to a mark 5 Tu
155. e VTR START button and check that recording starts and that the counter indication changes Press the VTR START button again and check that the tape stops and that the counter indication also stops changing Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN and check that the counter indication changes regardless of whether the tape is running Set the DISPLAY switch to DATA and the DATA DISPLAY switch to U BIT and check that the user bit data that was set is displayed Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting eoueusluley g Ja deyo 133 soueusjuleW g Jaydeyo 134 8 2 Maintenance 8 2 1 Cleaning the Video Heads To clean the video heads use a Sony BCT HD12CL Cleaning Cassette Follow the instructions given with the cleaning cassette as incorrect or excessive use could damage the video heads To clean the heads perform the following Load the cleaning cassette according to the procedure described in Loading a cassette page 35 The tape runs automatically in PLAY mode for about 5 seconds to clean the head After the tape runs the cleaning cassette is automatically ejected Do not run the cleaning cassette more than 5 times consecutively 8 2 2 Cleaning the Viewfinder Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and mirror inside the viewfinder barrel Clean the lens and protecting filter with a commercially available lens cleaner Never use organic solvents su
156. e point level KNEE SLOPE R 99 to 99 0 Sets the R knee slope level KNEE POINT G 45 0 to 14 0 00 Sets the G knee point level KNEE SLOPE G 99 to 99 0 Sets the G knee slope level KNEE POINT B 45 0 to 14 0 0 0 Sets the B knee point level KNEE SLOPE B 99 to 99 0 Sets the B knee slope level Menu List No Page Item Settings Default Description P08 DETAIL 1 DETAIL OFF ON ON Sets the detail correction function on off APERTURE OFF ON ON Turns the aperture correction function on off DETAIL LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Sets the general level of the detail signal APERTURE LEVEL 1 to 14 Sets the aperture level DTL H V RATIO 99 to 99 Sets the level of the V detail signal CRISPENING 99 to 99 Sets the crispening level LEVEL DEPEND OFF ON ON Turns the level depend function on off LEVEL DEPEND LVL _ 99 to 99 0 Sets the level of the level depend function DETAIL FREQ 99 to 99 0 Sets the frequency of the H detail signal P09 DETAIL 2 KNEE APERTURE OFF ON OFF Turns the knee aperture function on off KNEE APT LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Sets the knee aperture level DTL WHT LIMIT 99 to 99 0 Sets the detail white limiter DTL BLK LIMIT 99 to 99 0 Sets the detail black limiter DTL V BLK LMT 99 to 99 0 Sets the V detail black limiter H V CONTROL MODE H V V V Select the operation mode of DETAIL H V RATIO on the DETAIL 1 page H V H and V
157. e second bar from the top turns on occasionally this is allowed Push the MENU knob The audio input level of audio channel 3 is set to the level adjusted in step Adjust the audio input level of audio channel 4 similarly To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Adjusting the Audio Level 71 BulpioceyY 104 suas pue sjuewsnipy Jeldey9 1h Bulpsooey 10 sumes pue sjuswjsnipy y 13 dey9 HAI 72 4 5 Setting the Time Data 4 5 1 Setting the Time Code The time code setting range is from 00 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 29 hours minutes seconds frames F Pal H T a font HOLD button Gj DO HOLD RESET DISPLAY LIGHT WARNING T Set the DISPLAY switch to TC 2 Set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to PRESET 3 Set the FRUN SET R RUN switch to SET The first leftmost digit of time code flashes 4 Using the SHIFT and ADVANCE buttons set the time code SHIFT Selects a digit to set Each time you press the button the flashing digit moves one column to the right Pressing this button while holding down the HOLD button moves the flashing digit one column to the left ADVANCE Increments the value of the flashing digit Pre
158. e used as the VBS SDI output connector 3 When an optional HKDW 702 902R is installed this item is displayed When an HKDW 702 is installed the SD output signal is not effective for 23 98PsF 24PsF When an HKDW 902R is installed the SD output signal is not effective for 24PsF As a result this menu operation is disabled in such a case 4 When one of 50i 25PsF or 24PsF is selected this item is not displayed 5 When one of 50i 25PsF 24PsF or 23 98PsF is selected this item is not displayed sexipueddy 160 Menu List FILE Menu The following table lists and describes the items in the FILE menu When the setting range in the Settings column is surrounded by parentheses the setup value is a relative value The setting range shown on the menu screen may differ from what is shown in the manual F ID 16 characters No Page Item Settings Default Description F01 USER FILE USER FILE LOAD EXEC See 6 1 Saving and Loading User Files on USER FILE SAVE EXEC page 106 F ID 16 characters USER PRESET EXEC See 5 4 Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Standard Settings on page 104 F02 USERFILE2 STORE USR PRESET EXEC Sets the pages registered in the USER menu to the standard setting CLEAR USR PRESET EXEC Clears the standard setting of pages registered in the USER menu CUSTOMIZE R
159. ears If the CONTENTS page is displayed push the MENU knob once then turn the MENU knob to move the mark to LED then push the MENU knob again to display the LED page If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the l LED page appears then push the MENU knob to select the page The current setting of each item appears on the right of the item 06 LED GAIN SHUTTER WHITE BAL 5600K ATW EXTENDER FILTER OVERRIDE FORMAT lt 1 lt 1 lt 1 lt 1 lt 1 lt 1 lt 1 lt 1 lt 1 VVVVVVVVY The following table shows operations under the condition where LED STD has been pre adjusted at the factory Item Contents GAIN Lights when the gain is set to anything but 0 cB SHUTTER Lights when the SHUTTER selector is set to anything but 1 48 WHITE BAL Lights when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST 5600K Lights when the 5600K mode is set to ON Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen 4 5 Item Contents ATW Lights when ATW is being used EXTENDER Lights when the lens extender is used FILTER Lights when the FILTER selector is set to anything but ND 1 CC B OVERRIDE Lights when the reference value of the auto iris adjustment is other than the standard value FORMAT Lights when the frame frequency is set to other than 23 98PsF Perform the settings for each item Turn the MENU knob to move
160. ecorded picture Set HD SDI OUT to ON e When an optional HKDW 702 902R is installed connect an HD color video monitor to the HD SDI OUT connector located on the rear of the camcorder For details see 5 3 2 Selecting Output Signals on page 94 When using an optional HKDW 702 902R extension board for down converting Connect the color video monitor to the TEST OUT connector or the HD SDI OUT connector of the camcorder located on the side of the camcorder By pressing the PLAY button you can view the recorded picture The signal output from each connector depends on the menu settings For details see 5 3 2 Selecting Output Signals on page 94 Checking Recording and Playback 3 3 3 Checking the Camera Picture on the Viewfinder and or Color Video Monitor Usually during playback of a tape if you press the PLAY button the image sent to the viewfinder the TEST OUT connector or the HD SDI OUT connector is switched back and forth between the camera image and the recorded image However the PB VIDEO item on the FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu allows you to change the setting so that the image seen through the camera is sent to the viewfinder and the TEST OUT connector even while you are playing back a video tape The HD SDI output from the HD SDI OUT connector is switched to that of the recorded image during playback regardless of the PB VIDEO setting To output recorded video signal to the viewfi
161. ed off during recording in Auto Interval Rec mode When you set the POWER switch to OFF the camcorder will switch itself off after the tape has run for a few seconds to record the picture data stored in memory If you remove the battery unplug the DC cable or cut power to the AC adaptor during auto interval recording picture data stored before recording stops a maximum of 5 seconds may be lost Take care when changing the battery When tape runs out during auto interval recording Note that picture data a maximum of 5 seconds shot and stored before the tape stops is not recorded if the tape runs out and the camcorder stops Manual Interval Rec mode Manual Interval Rec has the following two modes Single Trigger mode Each time the VTR START button or VTR button on the lens is pressed the camcorder captures to memory a single shot consisting of the specified number of video frames Continuous Trigger mode Once the VTR START button or VTR button on the lens is pressed the camcorder captures consecutive shots to memory at the specified interval with each shot consisting of the specified number of video frames Setting Single Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec 1 Follow steps 1 to 5 in To make settings before shooting page 43 to select CACHE INTVAL REC on the FUNCTION 1 page 2 Turn the MENU knob until M INT appears O3OFUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt TURBO SW TURBO FRONT MIC SELECT ST
162. eels lightly turn them gently with your fingers in the directions shown below If the reels will not move there is no slack to adjust About Cassettes 35 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey g saydeyp WHI yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey E Ja deyo HAI 36 Unloading a cassette With the power supply on press the EJECT button to open the cassette compartment lid Then take out the cassette If you are not going to insert another cassette close the cassette lid Even if the battery is exhausted and the VTR stops it is possible to take out the cassette and close the cassette compartment lid if the remaining battery voltage is about 10 5 V or more However when the battery voltage is low do not repeat the unloading operation If you repeat the operation the power may be turned off during the ejection operation and you may not be able to continue the operation When you do not intend to use the camcorder for a long time take out the cassette to protect the tape and turn off the power Unloading a cassette manually manual eject When you cannot unload a cassette even if you press the EJECT button take out the cassette manually as illustrated below Cassette compartment lid Turn the power off 0Open this rubber cover Pushing on the screw inside with a screwdriver turn the screw clockwise until the cassette lid opens You need not return the screw to its original position af
163. eing read from or written to the Memory Stick At this time do not shake the computer or product or subject them to shock Do not turn off the power of the computer and product or remove the Memory Stick This may damage the data About a Memory Stick Precautions To prevent data loss make backups of data frequently In no event will Sony be liable for any loss of data Unauthorized recording may be contrary to the provisions of copyright law When you use a Memory Stick that has been pre recorded be sure that the material has been recorded in accordance with copyright and other applicable laws The Memory Stick application software may be modified or changed by Sony without prior notice Note that there are certain restrictions on recording stage performances and other entertainment events even if they are recorded for personal use only co PaaS e Memory Stick and MagicGate Memory Stick are trademarks of Sony Corporation e Memory Stick Duo and Memory Stick Duo are trademarks of Sony Corporation e Memory Stick PRO and Memory Stick PRO are trademarks of Sony Corporation e Memory Stick PRO Duo and Memory Stick PRO Duo are trademarks of Sony Corporation e Memory Stick ROM and Memory Stick ROM are trademarks of Sony Corporation e MagicGate Memory Stick is trademark of Sony Corporation e MagicGate and macicGare are trademarks of Sony
164. enerator enabling the camcorder Features to hold the time code for approximately 5 years without supplying the power to the camcorder e The time code can be displayed in the LCD window screen even when the power is off The automatic power shut off function allows you to set the time to be displayed from among three patterns 1 LTC Longitudinal Time Code 2 VITC Vertical Interval Time Code Picture cache recording interval recording function Installing an optional HKDW 703 extension board allows the camcorder to constantly store a few seconds up to 8 seconds of the most current picture and sound data in the board s memory As a result when you press the VTR START button the recording starts with the data stored a few seconds before Installing an optional HKDW 703 extension board enables the camcorder to record pictures intermittently Other VTR functions Recording continuity from the very next frame is ensured You can automatically rewind and review the last 2 seconds of the recording on the tape for a quick check immediately after shooting A four times normal speed color search function provides quick positioning of the tape With the RE TAKE function the camcorder searches for the most recently recorded cut and records the new cut over it With the End Search function the camcorder searches for the point most recently recorded on the tape and automatically switches to recording pause mode REC pause The
165. er on page SHUTTER 1 33 OFF ON ON SHUTTER 1 40 OFF ON ON SHUTTER 1 48 OFF ON ON SHUTTER 1 50 OFF ON ON SHUTTER 1 60 OFF ON ON SHUTTER 1 96 OFF ON ON SHUTTER 1 100 OFF ON ON SHUTTER 1 120 OFF ON ON SHUTTER 1 125 OFF ON ON SHUTTER 1 250 OFF ON ON SHUTTER 1 500 OFF ON ON SHUTTER 1 1000 OFF ON ON SHUTTER 1 2000 OFF ON ON O 19 LENS FILE LENS FILE SELECT 1 to 32 1 See 5 3 7 Selecting a Lens F ID Display only File on page 99 L ID Display only To show the lens specific ID when a serial lens is connected L MF Display only To show the name of the lens manufacturer when a serial lens is connected 20 UMID SET EX OWNERSHIP REC OFF ON OFF See 5 3 8 Using UMID Data COUNTRY CODE 4 alphanumeric o pag 100 characters ORGANIZATION 4 alphanumeric characters USER CODE 4 alphanumeric characters INSTANCE NO RND GEN RND TIME ZONE 00 to 25 1A to 1F 2A 00 to 2F 32 3A to 3F MACHINE n 1 When an optional HKDW 702 902R is installed the HD SDI OUT connector located on the side of the camcorder can be used as the VBS SDI output connector 2 This item is displayed when an optional HKDW 702 902R is installed When an HKDW 702 is installed the SD output signal is not effective for 23 98PsF 24PsF When an HKDW 902R is installed the SD output signal is not effective for 24PsF As a result this menu operation is disabled in such a case 3 When one of 50i 25PsF 24PsF o
166. er an arbitrary string In this case a rule the code 00 must be entered Freelance operators who do not belong to an organization should ee 99 enter USER CODE When you select this item the USER CODE window appears Enter the 4 byte alphanumeric strings for user identification The user code is registered with each organization locally It is usually not centrally registered When the user code is less than 4 bytes enter the user code from the beginning of the 4 bytes and enter the space character 20h in the remaining strings This user code is determined by the organization The methods used depend on the organization User bits cannot be entered when no organization code has been entered INSTANCE NO Select the method for generating the numbers to be used to identify original video images RND Random GEN Generation number of times of copy Ask the system administrator for advice TIME ZONE When you select this item the TIME ZONE window appears The UTC is calculated based on the local time using the time zone If the time zone is not set properly the UTC will not be recorded correctly TIME ZONE ESC GREENWICH AZORES M ATRANTIC ARZENTINE HALIFAX NEW YORK CHICAGO DENVER LOSANGELES ALASKA Set the time difference from UTC When setting summer time or daylight savings time change the code to one which will advance the time by 1 hour Adjustments and Settings from Menus
167. er or colder The OFFSET WHT page of the OPERATION menu allows you to make this setting 1 Holding down the MENU knob move the MENU ON OFF switch from OFF to ON The TOP menu appears 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to OPERATION then push the MENU knob If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page appears If the menu has been used before the page accessed last appears 3 If the CONTENTS page is displayed push the MENU knob once and turn the MENU knob to move the mark to OFFSET WHT Then push the MENU knob to display the OFFSET WHT page If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the OFFSET WHT page appears then push the MENU knob to select that page The current setting of each item appears on the right of the item Adjustments and Settings from Menus 95 sBules pelrejeq pue shejdsiq nuaw g Je deyo9 HMI sbumes paliejeq pue shejdsiq nue g Je deyo HAI 96 1600FFSET WHT sOFFSET WHITE lt A gt OFF WARM COOL lt A gt 3200 WARM COOL BAL lt A gt 0 OFFSET WHITE lt B gt OFF WARM COOL lt B gt 3200 WARM COOL BAL lt B gt 0 Item Description OFFSET Turns the setting of the offset for WHITE lt A gt channel A ON or OFF ON Adds the offset adjusted on this page to the white balance WARM COOL__ When OFFSET WHITE lt A gt is ON lt A gt sets the offset for the white balance of channel A using the color temperat
168. es 20 15 20 to 15 minutes 15 10 15 to 10 minutes 10 5 10 to 5 minutes 5 0 5 to 2 minutes 5 0 flashing 2 to 0 minutes Audio level These items indicate the level of audio channel 1 and channel 2 The peak indication of the VTR level meter is related as follows to the audio level when a 1 kHz sine wave is input Audio channel 1 level indicator 1 PPE Audio channel2 27H EEE l level indicator 1 to VTR level meter 40 30 20 17 14 dB indicator Shutter speed This indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode However if the SHUTTER selector is set to OFF nothing is displayed 1 100 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 Shutter speed in seconds in standard mode ECS ECS mode EVS EVS mode 1F to 8F 16F 32F 64F Number of frames in SLS mode 1 The SLS mode is effective only when an optional HKDW 905R extension board is installed Gain This indicates the gain of the video amplifier as set by the GAIN selector White balance memory This indicates the currently selected white balance automatic adjustment memory A Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to A B Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to B P Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST T Displayed when ATW is being used When an optional RM B 150 B750 Remote Control Unit is connected you can switch the memory using the switch on the R
169. et to the CH 3 4 position Set this switch to CH 1 2 1 To record stereo sound Set both AUDIO IN CH 1 and CH 2 switches to FRONT Adjusting the Audio Level 69 BulpiooeyY 104 sumas pue s uewsnipy Jeldey9 1h Bulpso9ey 10 sumes pue sjuewjsnipy y 13 dey9 HAI 70 To record monaural sound Set the appropriate AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 switch corresponding to the channel to which you want to record and adjust the monaural sound signal to FRONT For detailed information on stereo or monaural recording see Recording stereo sound on page 121 2 Set the AUDIO SELECT switch es for the desired channel s selected in step 1 to MANUAL 3 Turn the MIC LEVEL control and adjust it so that the audio level meter shows up to 20 dB for a normal input volume e The 9 bars from the bottom among the 17 bars go on with the normal input volume e The second top bar may turn on occasionally but do not allow the top bar to go on If it goes on the audio level is too high Even if a stereo microphone is connected you cannot adjust the levels of the L channel and R channel separately Relationships between recording levels and level controls You can select the audio level controls to be used to adjust the level of the front microphone using MIC CH1 LEVEL page 155 and MIC CH2 LEVEL page 155 on the AUDIO 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu The factory
170. f the L M and H positions in any sequence To change the gain corresponding to another switch position repeat steps 3 and 4 5 Toend the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Item Content HD SDI OUT Sets whether or not the video signal is output from the HD SDI OUT connector When OFF is selected the HD SDI circuit is disconnected which saves power SD REAR BNC Selects the type of video signal to be OUT output from the HD SDI OUT connector located on the side of the camcorder OFF VBS or SDI 2 TEST OUT Selects the type of video signal to be SELECT 7 output from the TEST OUT connector When HD is selected an HD Y signal is output When SD is selected a down converted color composite signal is output 3 5 3 2 Selecting Output Signals The OUTPUT SEL page of the USER menu allows you select whether the HD SDI OUT connectors output an HD SDI signal or not When an optional HKDW 702 HKDW 902R extension board is installed in the camcorder you can select the type of video signals from the HD SDI OUT connector located on the side of the camcorder and the TEST OUT connector among from SD VBS or SD SDI T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended appears on the viewfinder screen 2 Turn the MENU knob until the OUTPUT SEL page appears and push the MENU knob The OUTPUT SEL page appears The current setting
171. file The white balance setting data selected when you save the scene file is saved For example when the WHITE BAL switch is set to A the adjusted values in memory A are saved in the scene file and when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST the preset value is saved Saving scene files from the camcorder memory to the Memory Stick You can save five scene files from the camcorder to the Memory Stick in a single operation After displaying the SCENE FILE page turn the MENU knob to move the mark to SCENE STORE then push the MENU knob One of the SCENE STORE pages appears 2 Turn the MENU knob until the desired SCENE STORE page appears then push the MENU knob PO1 SCENE STORE ESC DISPLAY MODE 0 ALL SCENE 1 SCENE2 FEB 05 02 FEB 06 02 SCENE4 FEB 08 02 SCENES FEB 08 02 SFILE SAVE MEMI 5 NO FILE 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to SFILE SAVE MEM1 5 then push the MENU knob Saving and Loading Scene Files eq umes esp Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 9 Jajdeyo hhh 111 eyeq Buijes sn Bulpeo7 pue Bulneg 9 Jaydeyo HAI 112 P0O1 SCENE STORE DISPLAY MODE SCENE1 SCENE2 NO FILE SCENE4 SCENES SFILE SAVE MEMI 5S When the save is completed the message COMPLETE appears 4 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF If files have been saved in the page selected in step 2 those files are replaced with files loaded from the camcorder memory
172. finder screen Hold down the RET button on the lens The image of the return video signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector is displayed on the viewfinder screen while you are holding down the RET button When the return video function is assigned to the ASSIGN 1 switch you can see the image of the return video signal on the viewfinder screen while you are holding down the ASSIGN 1 switch even if the RETURN VIDEO item is set to OFF on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu When no signal is input to the GENLOCK IN connector the image is not changed even if you hold down the RET button on the lens However the image is switched while you are holding down the ASSIGN 1 switch to which the return video function is assigned even if no signal is input to the GENLOCK IN connector 5 3 Adjustments and Settings from Menus The camcorder provides menus for adjustments and settings 5 3 1 Setting Gain Values for the GAIN Selector Positions Before using the camcorder use the GAIN SW page of the USER menu to set the gains corresponding to the L M and H positions of the GAIN selector which switches the gain of the video amplifier T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The menu page accessed last appears on the viewfinder screen 2 Tur the MENU knob until the GAIN SW page appears then push the MENU knob to select the page The current setting of each item appears on the right of the item O80G
173. focusing easier It has no effect on the camera output signal ZEBRA switch Controls the zebra pattern on the viewfinder screen ON The zebra pattern is displayed and stays OFF No zebra pattern is displayed MOMENT The zebra pattern is displayed and stays for 5 to 6 seconds The zebra pattern is factory set to indicate picture areas where the video level is approximately 70 You can use the setup menu to change the setting so that areas where the video level is 100 and above are also displayed at the same time 1 The zebra pattern is picture areas where the video level is approximately 70 and 100 or more It is used as a guide when adjusting the iris manually For information about how to change the zebra pattern setting in the setup menu see 5 2 6 Setting the Viewfinder on page 88 You can assign the function of the ZEBRA switch to the ASSIGN 1 switch ASSIGN 2 switch or TURBO GAIN button on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu For details see 5 3 5 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches on page 96 TALLY switch Controls the TALLY indicator setting its brightness HIGH or LOW or turning it off HIGH The TALLY indicator brightness is high OFF The TALLY indicator is off LOW The TALLY indicator brightness is low Diopter adjustment ring Adjusts the viewfinder image for your vision Viewfinder front rear positioning lever To adjust the viewfinder position in the f
174. from the TEST OUT connector when CROP is selected Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item you want to set and push the MENU knob The at the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark at the left of the setting changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob to change the desired setting and push the MENU knob The mark at the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark at the left of the setting changes to a mark To continue changing of another output signal setting repeat steps 3 and 4 5 To end menu operations turn the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF 5 3 3 Setting the Color Temperature Manually You can adjust the value of the white balance manually by setting the color temperature 1 Holding down the MENU knob move the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The TOP menu appears 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to PAINT then push the MENU knob If this is the first time the PAINT menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page appears If the menu has been used before the page accessed last appears 3 Ifthe CONTENTS page is displayed push the MENU knob once and turn the MENU knob to move the mark to WHITE Then push the MENU knob to display the WHITE page If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the WHITE page appears then push the MENU knob to select that page The current setting of each item appears on the right of
175. g the iris and zoom functions 1 2 Set the zoom to automatic zoom mode and check that the power zoom operates correctly Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and check the zoom functions manually Set the iris switch on the lens to AUTO and point the camera at objects of different brightness Check that the automatic iris adjustment operates correctly Set the iris switch on the lens to MANUAL and check that turning the iris ring manually adjusts the iris correctly Set the iris switch on the lens back to AUTO and check the following points when the GAIN selector is moved from L to M to H e For objects of the same brightness the iris is adjusted to correspond to the change in setting e The gain indicator on the viewfinder screen changes to correspond to the change in setting If an extender mechanism is incorporated in your lens set the extender lever of the lens into the 2x position and check the following points e The indication EX appears at the top left on the viewfinder screen e The auto iris functions correctly Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting eoueualuley g Ja deyp 131 soueusjuleW g Ja deyo 132 8 1 3 Testing the VTR Perform tests 1 to 6 consecutively 1 Testing the tape transport functions 1 Set the VTR SAVE STBY switch to VTR SAVE and check that the VTR SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes on Set the VTR SAVE STBY switch to ST
176. gin recording To continue from the end of a recording already on the tape press the STOP button immediately after the end of the previously recorded segment within 0 5 seconds 3 Press the RET button The tape will rewind and will be positioned at the desired point to continue recording 4 Press the VTR START button on the camcorder or the VTR button on the lens to start recording Setting for recording good shot marks on the LTC UBIT area on the tape Switch cover MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch 3 2 3 Recording Good Shot Marks Good shot marks 1 and 2 are recorded on the LTC UBIT area of the tape when the RET button on the lens is pressed during recording Recording shot marks 1 and 2 for scenes containing important images and sounds enables quick access to the marked points This increases editing efficiency For detailed information on shot marker operations refer to the manual supplied with your VTR A setting on the SHOT MARKER page of the MAINTENANCE menu determines whether or not good shot marks are recorded to the tape 1 Shot mark Time code of the scene to be used as the editing point when editing 1 Open the switch cover first Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON while pushing the MENU knob The TOP menu appears lt TOP MENU gt USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to MAINTENANCE then push the MEN
177. git Hexadecimal digits A to F are displayed as follows Hexadecimal A B C D Display A b C d m ma To reset the user bit data to 00 00 00 00 Press the RESET button D Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN or R RUN corresponding to the desired operating mode for the time code generator The user bit data set will be recorded for both LTC and VITC Storing the user bit setting in memory The user bit setting apart from the real time is automatically retained in memory even when the power is turned off 4 5 4 Synchronizing the Time Code You can synchronize the internal time code generator of this camcorder with an external generator for the regeneration of an external time code You can also synchronize the time code generators of other camcorders VTRs with the internal generator of this camcorder Connections for time code synchronization Connect both the reference video signal and the external time code as illustrated below Example 1 Synchronizing with an external time code 5 ek TC IN External time code 1 Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page page 159 of the MAINTENANCE menu if GENLOCK is set to OFF Setting the Time Data 73 Buip o094 104 sBumes pue sjuewisnipy p 13 dey9 ii Bulpsooey 10 sumes pue sjuewjsnipy y 13 dey9 HAI 74 Example 2 Interconnecting a number of camcorders for time code synchronization TEST OUT
178. gn tiques mission e EN55103 2 Sensibilit lectromagn tique immunit Ce produit est pr vu pour tre utilis dans les environnements lectromagn tiques suivants E1 r sidentiel E2 commercial et industrie l g re E3 urbain ext rieur et E4 environnement EMC contr l ex studio de t l vision Um die Gefahr von Branden oder elektrischen Schlagen zu verringern darf dieses Gerat nicht Regen oder Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt werden Um einen elektrischen Schlag zu vermeiden darf das Gehause nicht ge ffnet werden Uberlassen Sie Wartungsarbeiten stets nur qualifiziertem Fachpersonal Fur Kunden in Europa Dieses Produkt besitzt die CEKennzeichnung und erf llt die EMVRichtlinie 89 336 EWG der EGKommission Angewandte Normen e EN55103 1 Elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit St6raussendung e EN55103 2 Elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit Storfestigkeit f r die folgenden elektromagnetischen Umgebungen E1 Wohnbereich E2 kommerzieller und in beschranktem Ma e industrieller Bereich E3 Stadtbereich im Freien und E4 kontrollierter EMVBereich z B Fernsehstudio 3 4 Table of Contents Setting the Frame Frequency sssseeeeceeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 Chapter 1 Overview Ped POAtUreS E E 11 Dede Camera Feat res cesna eraa a ONS 11 Dee VTR Feature Sorton E cay eo ice ares E E 12 l1 3 Other Feattre Sinne a 12 1 2 Example of System Configuration csss
179. h the MENU knob The mark returns to a gt mark and the mark returns to a mark In the following cases jumping to the target page is impossible e When the power is turned on after you insert a Memory Stick When OFF is selected for the M S IN gt JUMP TO item e When any of the following menu pages is already displayed A file related page such as the USER FILE page of the FILE menu MEMORY STICK ALL FILE SCENE FILE LENS FILE REFERENCE FILE or ROM VERSION page Jumping to a File Related Menu Page When Inserting a Memory Stick eyeq Buljes sn Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 9 Jajdeyo A 115 Jaepiooweg y dN Bumes Z Ja deyo HAI 116 Setting Up the Camcorder 7 1 Power Supply The following power supplies can be used with the camcorder e BP GL65 GL95 L60S Lithium ion battery pack e AC power using the AC DN10 AC adaptor 7 1 1 Using a Battery Pack When a BP GL95 battery pack is used the camcorder will operate continuously for about 110 minutes When a BP GL65 is used the camcorder will operate continuously for about 80 minutes Before use charge the battery pack with a BC L70 M150 Battery Charger It takes about 145 minutes to charge one BP GL95 For details refer to the battery charger operation manual Note on using the battery pack A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully recharged Attaching the battery pack 1 Press the battery pack against the back of the camc
180. h the STOP button during playback To activate the end search function push the STOP button again to stop the camcorder then push the RET button on the lens 3 3 Checking Recording and Playback By pressing the PLAY button you can review any length of recording in the viewfinder in black and white There are two other ways to review the recording e Recording review You can view the last 2 seconds of the recording in the viewfinder in black and white e Color playback You can see the recording in color on a color video monitor without the need for any external adaptor You may also view the picture during searching by rewinding or fast forwarding by pressing the PLAY REW button or PLAY F FWD button See 2 3 Audio Functions on page 19 for information about the switches and controls used to select the audio output signal and to adjust the audio level If you play back the tape recorded on this camcorder by using the HDW F900 HD camcorder the noise may occur 3 3 1 Checking the Last Two Seconds of the Recording Recording Review If you press the RET button on the lens while recording is paused the last 2 seconds of the recording is played back on the viewfinder screen and the color LCD Use this function to check whether recording went smoothly If you hold the RET button down longer at most 10 seconds of the tape is rewound and played back After playback the camcorder is ready to start recording again
181. h to OFF Menu Organization and Operation This section explains operations on the USER menu as an example Operations for other menus are the same as those on the USER menu Also if optional extension boards are not installed in your camcorder some items on the USER menu pages are not displayed T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON A USER menu page normally appears When the USER menu has been used before the page accessed last appears In this case go to step 2 Example 930FUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ATW ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt OFF TURBO SW TURBO FRONT MIC SELECT STREO DF NDF DF END SEARCH OFF CACHE INTVAL REC OFF When this is the first time the USER menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the USER menu appears In this case follow the procedure below Or you can access the desired page from the CONTENTS page by going to step 2 instead of performing the operations in steps and Push the MENU knob once then turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired page number This indicates that the menu screen can be scrolled downwards This indicates that the menu screen can be scrolled upwards SHOT ID mark Push the MENU knob The selected page is displayed Go to step 4 Turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears Push the MENU knob A mark appears on the left of the item currently selected on the page O7OGAIN SW GAIN LOW
182. hange the order of pages Follow steps 1 2 and 3 in Adding a new page on page 78 to display the EDIT PAGE page of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to the page that you want to move The mark changes to a mark The message PUSH TO PAGE INSERT appears at the right top of the screen 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the position where you want to move the page selected in step 1 O1OEDIT PAGE PUSH_TO PAGE INSERT age 01 QUTPUT SEL FUNCTION1 3 VF DISP 1 LED 8 AUTO IRI 4 Push the MENU knob The page selected in step 2 is moved to the position selected in step 3 In the above example AUTO IRIS will be moved to the 04 position and the LED and following items will be moved down one line 5 1 4 Adding Functions to be Assigned to Assignable Switches You can add items to be assigned to assignable switches using the ASSIGN EDIT page of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu T Follow steps 1 2 and 3 in Adding a new page on page 78 to display the ASSIGN EDIT window of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu 21OASSIGN EDIT TOP Add New Item 2 Move the mark to Add New Item this operation is unnecessary if no item exists on the page as shown in the figure for step 1 then push the MENU knob 410SW STATUS ESC ee SELECT ITEM ah GAMMA BLACK GAMMA MATRIX KNEE WHITE CLIP DETAIL APERTURE FLARE EVS TEST SAW 3 Add the des
183. he MENU knob until the desired page appears then push the MENU knob Example When you want to select the USER 2 EDIT page O3OUSER2 EDIT Add New Item TOP 4 Move the mark to Add New Item this operation is unnecessary if no item exists on the page as shown in the figure for step 3 then push the MENU knob The page for the last added item appears 430BLACK FLARE ESC ee SELECT ITEM eee MASTER BLACK 0 R BLACK B BLACK MASTER FLARE R FLARE G FLARE B FLARE FLARE TEST OUT SEL 5 Add the items Turn the MENU knob until the page that has the desired items appears then push the MENU knob Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to the desired item then push the MENU knob The USER 2 EDIT page appears again displaying the newly added item 6 To add the remaining items repeat steps 4 to 6 You can add up to 10 items on one page To delete items from a page You can delete items from any of the USER 1 EDIT to USER 19 EDIT pages 1 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item to be deleted 2 Push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to CANCEL PRST The message DELETE ITEM OK appears 3 Push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to CANCEL PRST again The item is deleted To change the order of items on a page 1 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item to be replaced then push the MENU knob 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to the position where you
184. he MENU knob until the page that contains the desired file number appears then push the MENU knob Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to the desired file number then push the MENU knob P0O1 SCENE RECALL DISPLAY MODE 01 SCENE1 SCENE2 SCENES 5FILE LOAD gt MEMI 5 When loading is completed the message COMPLETE appears If no file is present with a particular file number this is shown as NO FILE 4 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Loading scene files from a Memory Stick into the camcorder memory You can load up to five scene files stored in the Memory Stick into the camcorder memory in a single operation After displaying the SCENE FILE page turn the MENU knob to move the mark to SCENE RECALL then push the MENU knob A SCENE RECALL screen appears 2 Turn the MENU knob until the page that contains the desired scene files appears then push the MENU knob 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to SFILE LOAD MEM 1 5 then push the MENU knob PO1 SCENE RECALL DISPLAY MODE SCENE 1 SC SCENES 5FILE LOAD gt MEMI 5 When loading is complete the message COMPLETE appears and the ACCESS indicator goes off To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF The scene files loaded from the Memory Stick overwrite data saved in the camcorder memory To load the scene file saved in the camcor
185. he camera Support of a video engineer is usually required to use this menu Although you can also use an external remote control panel or master setup unit to set the items on this menu this menu is effective when using the camcorder by itself outdoors e MAINTENANCE menu This menu contains items for performing camera maintenance operations such as changing the system or using infrequently used paint items FILE menu This menu is for performing file operations such as writing the reference file e DIAGNOSIS menu This menu enables you to confirm the VTR status or identify a failed circuit board Returning to the TOP menu from other menus There are two methods for returning to the TOP menu e Align the mark with TOP at the top right of the menu page then push the MENU knob TOP will always be displayed at the top right of the menu page once following setting is made while holding the MENU knob set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON to display the TOP menu Push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE position repeatedly until the TOP menu appears CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch Switch cover 5 1 2 Basic Menu Operations When you open the cover of the menu operating section the MENU ON OFF switch appears If the MENU ON OFF switch is set to ON the menu is displayed on the viewfinder screen Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU ON OFF switc
186. he settings for each item Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to the item you want to set then push the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob to change the setting then push the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item returns to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting returns to a mark 4 To continue setting other items repeat step 3 5 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF 5 2 6 Setting the Viewfinder The VF SETTING page of the USER menu allows you to select items related to the viewfinder ESCAPE switch MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The menu page accessed last appears on the viewfinder screen 2 Turn the MENU knob until the VF SETTING page appears then push the MENU knob to select the page The current setting of each item appears on the right of the item 11OUF SETTING ZEBRA OFF ZEBRA SELECT 1 ZEBRA DET LUL 70 ZEBRA2 DET LVL 100 ASPECT OFF UF DETAIL LEVEL 0 UF DTL H LEVEL 0 VF DTL V LEVEL 0 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen Item Description ZEBRA ZEBRA SELECT Turns the zebra display on or off 1 Selects ZEBRA 1 ZEBRA 2 or BOTH ZEBRA1 DET LVL Adjusts the level of the zebra 1 factory setting 70 displ
187. ht protection technology that uses encryption technology Before using a Memory Stick Terminal Write protect tab Labelling position e When you set the Memory Stick erasure prevention switch to LOCK data cannot be recorded edited or erased Data may be damaged if You remove the Memory Stick or turn off the unit while it is reading or writing data You use the Memory Stick in a location subject to the effects of static electricity or electric noise We recommend that you make a backup copy of important data that you record on the Memory Stick About a Memory Stick 165 soxipueddy 166 Do not attach anything other than the supplied label to the Memory Stick labeling position Attach the label so that it does not stick out beyond the labeling position Carry and store the Memory Stick in its case Do not touch the connector of the Memory Stick with anything including your finger or metallic objects Do not strike bend or drop the Memory Stick Do not disassemble or modify the Memory Stick Do not allow the Memory Stick to get wet Do not use or store the Memory Stick in a location that is Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the sun Under direct sunlight Very humid or subject to corrosive substances ACCESS Indicator If the access indicator is turned on or is flashing data is b
188. hutter speed in seconds or degrees RM COMMON OFF ON ON Selects whether or not to share settings when MEMORY an RM remote control unit is connected and when the camcorder is used alone VTR START STOP RM PARA CAM RM Selects which VTR START STOP buttons on the RM camera or both are enabled when an RM series remote control unit is connected FAN OFF ON AUTO ON OFF Stops a fan operation AUTO Stops a fan operation while the VTR of the camcorder is recording USER amp ALL ONLY OFF ON OFF Selects whether to show only USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE and ALL menus in the top menu HD SDI REMOTE OFF CHARA G OFF Selects the setting when recording as I F TLY R TLY synchronizing with multiple HDW S250 S280 cassette recorders by superimposing the trigger signal on the output signal from the HD SDI OUT connector OFF Does not carry out synchronous recording Selects the display method when the recording trigger signal is output from the HD SDI OUT connector when an HDW 250 S280 is recording CHARA REC 2 is displayed on the display section of the viewfinder G TYL The green tally is turned on R TLY The REC tally is turned on Pay attention to the fact that this REC tally is lit even when a cassette is not loaded in the camcorder SD ASPECT OFF ON OFF Selects whether the 16 9 SQEZE signal is PULSE 4 superimposed on the VBS SDI output signal from the HD SDI OUT connector located on the side of the camcorder when
189. iewfinder TALLY indicator BRIGHT control CONTRAST control PEAKING control ZEBRA switch TALLY switch Viewfinder front rear positioning lever Diopter adjustment ring Shooting and recording playback functions 1 Viewfinder when an optional HDVF 20A is used Lets you view the image in black and white while shooting recording or playing back It also displays various warnings and messages related to the settings or operating conditions of the camcorder a zebra pattern safety zone marker ID and center marker 2 1 The safety zone marker is a rectangle indicating the effective picture area 2 The center marker indicates the center of the picture with a crosshair For details see 5 2 5 Setting Marker Display on page 87 TALLY indicator Setting the TALLY switch to HIGH or LOW enables this indicator The indicator lights during recording on the VTR Like the REC indicator in the viewfinder it flashes to indicate a problem You can set the indicator brightness with the TALLY switch BRIGHT brightness control Adjusts the picture brightness on the viewfinder screen It has no effect on the camera output signal Shooting and Recording Playback Functions CONTRAST control Adjusts the picture contrast on the viewfinder screen It has no effect on the camera output signal O PEAKING control Adjusts the sharpness of the picture on the viewfinder screen to make
190. iewfinder screen 2 Push the MENU knob while the item and the current setting are displayed 66 99 appears at the left of the item 3 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting while is displayed Adjustments and Settings from Menus Viewfinder screen display When the function is assigned to the ASSIGN 1 switch push type the display disappears from the viewfinder screen 3 seconds after you perform the last operation When the function is assigned to the ASSIGN 2 switch slide type the display remains while the ASSIGN 2 switch is set to the ON position slide it in the direction of the arrow To make the display disappear set the switch to OFF 5 3 6 Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock You can set or change the date and time of the internal clock The date and time set are reflected in the time code 1 Holding down the MENU knob move the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The TOP menu appears 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to DIAGNOSIS then push the MENU knob If this is the first time the DIAGNOSIS menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page appears If the menu has been used before the page accessed last appears 3 Ifthe CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to TIME DATE then push the MENU knob to display the TIME DATE page If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the TIME DATE page appears then push the MENU knob to se
191. ifferent if an optional extension board is installed 5 1 1 Menu Organization The following shows the organization of menus that you can use to make various settings and adjustments TOP menu USER submenu OUTPUT SEL page m FUNCTION 1 page VF DISP 1 page VF DISP 2 page I LED page MARKER 1 page GAIN SW page VF SETTING page AUTO IRIS page SHOT ID page m SHOT DISP page SET STATUS page USER FILE page LENS FILE page USER MENU CUSTOMIZE submenu ALL submenu Just as with the USER submenu each submenu is composed of pages On these pages you can make various settings and adjustments Some pages have a window for more settings This manual refers to these submenus as the menu OPERATION submenu e PAINT submenu MAINTENANCE submenu FILE submenu e DIAGNOSIS submenu 1 In this manual the USER menu consisting of items and pages registered at the factory is used You can use the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu to add or delete pages according to how the camcorder is being used For details see 5 1 3 Editing the USER Menu on page 78 Chapter TOP menu The menus of the camcorder are composed of submenus classified into categories according to the frequency of use purpose of use and so on The TOP menu allows you to select the desired submenus To display TOP menu screen While holding down th
192. ifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment All interface cables used to connect peripherals must be shielded in order to comply with the limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules For the customers in Europe This product with the CE marking complies with the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC issued by the Commission of the European Community Compliance with this directive implies conformity to the following European standards e EN55103 1 Electromagnetic Interference Emission e EN55103 2 Electromagnetic Susceptibility Immunity This product is intended for use in the following Electromagnetic Environment s E1 residential E2 commercial and light industrial E3 urban outdoors E4 controlled EMC environment ex TV studio AVERTISSEMENT Afin de r duire les risques d incendie ou d lectrocution ne pas exposer cet appareil a la pluie ou a I humidit Afin d carter tout risque d lectrocution garder le coffret ferm Ne confier entretien de l appareil qu un personnel qualifi Pour les clients europ ens Ce produit portant la marque CE est conforme a la Directive sur la compatibilit lectromagn tique EMC 89 336 CEE mise par la Commission de la Communaut europ enne La conformit a cette directive implique la conformit aux normes europ ennes suivantes e EN55103 1 Interf rences lectroma
193. igh speed data transfer with this type of Memory Stick 1 Operation is not guaranteed for all of the compliant products Some products may not accept this type of Memory Stick Memory Stick ROM Stores pre recorded read only data You cannot record on Memory Stick ROM or erase the pre recorded data Memory Stick with Memory Select Function Composed of multiple 128 MB memory units The mechanical switch at the back of the Memory Stick allows you to select the memory unit to be used depending on usage The memory units cannot be used simultaneously and continuously Memory Stick PRO Memory Stick with MagicGate copyright protection technology exclusive for Memory Stick PRO compliant products Available types of Memory Stick You can use a Memory Stick or a MagicGate Memory Stick with your camcorder 32 64 and 128 MB compatible You can not use a Memory Stick Duo alone with your camcorder To use a Memory Stick Duo with your camcorder you must attach it to an optional Memory Stick Duo Adaptor If you insert a Memory Stick Duo without the adaptor it may become stuck in the slot and be impossible to remove Note on data read write speed Data read write speed may vary depending on the combination of the Memory Stick and Memory Stick compliant product you use What is MagicGate MagicGate is copyrig
194. ime the switch is pushed upward Each page is displayed for about 10 seconds OFF To clear the page immediately after display push this switch down to the OFF position You can select the pages to be displayed on the menu For details see 5 2 9 Displaying the Status Confirmation Windows on page 91 MENU ON OFF switch To use this switch open the switch cover This switch is used to display the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen 27 Menu Operating Section S 01 U0Q pUe Sed JO suonouny pue suoneoogq zg sa deu9 N S 01 U09 pUe seq JO suonouny pue suopeooq z 13 deyo 28 Closing the cover automatically sets this switch to OFF ON Displays the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen at the last accessed page When the menu is used for the first time the first page is displayed OFF Removes the menu from the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen CANCEL PRST preset ESCAPE switch To enable this switch set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF CANCEL PRST Pushing this switch up to this position displays the message to confirm whether the previous settings are cancelled or settings are reset to their initial values depending on the menu operating condition Pushing this switch up to this position again cancels the previous settings or resets the settings to their initial values ESCA
195. ing and CC filter selection FILTER selector outer knob setting CC filter selection A 5600K B 3200K C 4300K D 6300K FILTER selector inner knob setting and ND filter selection FILTER selector inner knob setting ND filter selection 1 Clear 2 1 4 ND Shooting and Recording Playback Functions 23 S 01 U0Q pUe seq JO suonouny pue suoneoog zg 13 deyo N FILTER selector inner knob setting ND filter selection 3 116 ND 4 164 ND Examples of shooting conditions and appropriate filters S 01 U09 pUe Sed JO suonouny pue suopeooq Zz saldeuD 24 Shooting condition CC filter ND filter Sunrise and sunset inside B 3200K 1 clear studio Clear skies C 4300K 2 1 4 ND or D 6300K or 1 A 5600K 3 16 ND Cloudy or raining D 6300K or 1 clear or A 5600K 2 1 4 ND Very bright conditions such C 4300K 3 1 16 ND or as snow at high altitudes D 6300K or 4 1 64 ND or at the seashore A 5600K ASSIGN 1 2 switches You can assign the desired functions to each of the ASSIGN 1 switch push button and ASSIGN 2 switch sliding on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu For details see 5 3 5 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches on page 96 SHUTTER selector Set this selector to ON to use the electronic shutter Push it down to SELECT to switch the shutter speed or mode setting within the range
196. ing changes to a mark 3 Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the desired freeze mode appears The freeze mode changes in the following sequence OFF lt gt FRAME gt FIELD Setting Contents OFF Deactivates the freeze function FRAME Freezes pictures in frame mode This mode is effective for freezing pictures of objects that are not moving FIELD Freezes pictures in field mode This mode is effective for freezing moving pictures 4 Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of the setting returns to a mark and the mark on the left of STOP KEY FREEZE returns to an mark 5 To end menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Viewing frozen pictures T Push the PLAY button to start playback 2 Push the STOP button at the instant when you want to freeze the picture The tape stops running and the picture is frozen The time code is displayed in the counter display and the PLAY indicator flashes one flash second Changing to another mode To cancel the freeze frame mode for viewing the frozen picture and change to another mode proceed as follows To restart playback Push the PLAY button To search the color picture Push the FFWD or REW buttons To view the pictures shot by the camcorder Push the STOP button To rewind the tape Push the REW button twice To fast forward the tape Push the F FWD button twice To eject the tape Push the EJECT button
197. ion on off CUE REC OFF ON ON Turns cue audio recording on off AU REF LEVEL 20 dB 18 dB 16 20 dB Sets the audio reference input level dB AU REF OUT 0 dB 4 dB 3 dB 0 dB Sets the output reference level AU CH12 AGC MONO STREO MONO Selects the automatic adjustment mode of the MODE input levels of analog audio signals to be recorded on channels 1 and 2 MONO to independently adjust channel 1 and 2 or STREO stereo mode AU CH34 AGC MONO STREO MONO Selects the automatic adjustment mode of the MODE input levels of analog audio signals to be recorded on channels 3 and 4 MONO to independently adjust channel 3 and 4 or STREO stereo mode AU AGC SPEC 6 9 12 15 17 6 dB Sets the AGC characteristics saturation dB level AU LIMITER MODE OFF 6 9 12 OFF Sets the limiter characteristics saturation 15 17 dB level for high level input signals in manual adjustment of the audio input level AU OUT LIMITER OFF ON ON Turns the audio output limiter on off Menu List No Mos Page AUDIO 3 Item AU SG 1kHz Settings ON OFF AUTO Default OFF Description Sets whether to output a 1 kHz test tone during the Color Bar mode or not ON a 1 kHz test tone is output during the Color Bar mode OFF a 1 kHz test tone is not output during the Color Bar mode AUTO a 1 kHz test tone is output only when the CH 1 AUDIO SELECT switch on the inside panel is in the AUTO position MIC CH1 LEVEL SID
198. ional HKDW 905R is installed in the camcorder Setting the shutter speed in ECS mode Set the shutter speed mode to ECS Viewfinder screen when ECS is selected ECS 60 00Hz 2 Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera to increase the value or clockwise to decrease the value until the desired frequency appears For the frequency range see the table in ECS Extended Clear Scan mode on page 62 When the ECS mode has already been selected the currently selected frequency is displayed by pushing the MENU knob In this case you can change the desired frequency only by turning the MENU knob When an optional RM B150 B750 Remote Control Unit is connected You can set the shutter speed of ECS with the rotary encoder of the RM B150 B750 Setting the Electronic Shutter Setting the shutter speed in SLS mode with an HKDW 905R board installed Installing an optional HKDW 905R extension board enables the camcorder to have the Slow Shutter function which provides ultra high sensitivity The Slow Shutter function is useful not only for shooting in extremely dark conditions but also for shooting moving objects with a special afterimage effect You can select the slow shutter speed from among 1 to 8 16 32 and 64 Set the shutter speed mode to SLS When the camcorder enters the SLS mode SLS FRAME appears xx indicates the n
199. ired items Turn the MENU knob until the page that has the desired items appears then push the MENU knob Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item then push the MENU knob The ASSIGN EDIT window appears again displaying the newly added item 4 Toadd the remaining items repeat steps 2 and 3 You can add up to 10 items To delete items or to change the order of items You can delete items from the page or change the order of items on the page by following the same operations as those for adding a new page You cannot add a blank line For details see To delete items from a page on page 79 and To change the order of items on a page on page 79 Menu Organization and Operation 81 sBules pelrejeq pue shejdsiq nuaw g Jeldey9 HHI sBumes p eeq pue s ejds q nue g Je deyo HAI 82 5 2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen The viewfinder screen displays not only the video picture but also characters and messages indicating the camcorder settings and operating status a center marker a safety zone marker etc When the MENU ON OFF switch is set to OFF and the DISPLAY switch is set to ON the items for which an For information about display item selection see 5 2 2 Selecting Display Items on page 84 For information about setting change and adjustment progress messages see 5 2 3 Display Modes and Setting Change Confirmation Adjustment Progress Messages on page 85
200. itch is set to CH 3 4 the audio channel level meters display the level of the audio signals recorded in audio channels CH 3 and CH 4 You can select the audio input signals to be recorded for audio channel CH 3 and CH 4 by using the AUDIO IN CH 3 CH 4 switches 4 4 1 Manually Adjusting the Audio Input Level of the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 Connectors Use the following procedure to adjust the audio levels of the audio input from the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connectors which are to be recorded in audio channels CH 1 and CH 2 Note When 1 and 2 are not displayed under the audio channel level meters the CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch is set to the CH 3 4 position Set this switch to CH 1 2 199 MIC LEVEL control a 1 Set either or both of the AUDIO IN switches to REAR as follows When adjusting the signals of audio channels 1 and 2 input to AUDIO IN CH1 AUDIO IN CH2 connectors Set both switches to REAR When adjusting the signal of either audio channel 1 or 2 input to AUDIO IN CH1 or AUDIO IN CH2 connector Set the AUDIO IN switch corresponding to the signal to be adjusted to REAR 2 Set the AUDIO SELECT switch es corresponding to the channel s selected in step 1 to MANUAL 3 With the LEVEL control for the channel selected in step 1 adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to 20 dB for a normal input volume The second bar from the top may
201. ite protected Recording the Recording Start Time Code onto the Memory Label Tele File 55 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey g saydeyp HH Mh yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey E Ja deyo HAI 56 3 4 4 Confirming the Remaining Capacity on the Memory Label 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in Setting the Tele File mark to be recorded for the first time after power on page 54 to display the TELE FILE page of the FILE menu 11 TELE FILE TELE FILE CLEAR TELE FILE MARK TOP EXEC OK ID SIZE REMAIN STATUS 1KBYTE 85 STANDBY The remaining capacity of the memory label is displayed on the REMAIN line You can record the recording start time code about 130 times on a memory label with a capacity of 1 Kilobyte When the remaining capacity of the memory label reaches 0 you cannot record the recording start time code any more 0 is displayed on the REMAIN line and the message MEMORY FULL is displayed on the STATUS line 3 4 5 Clearing Recorded Data 1 Follow steps 1 to 3in Setting the Tele File mark to be recorded for the first time after power on page 54 to display the TELE FILE page of the FILE menu Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to TELE FILE CLEAR then push the MENU knob 11 TELE FILE CLEAR DATA 0K TELE FILE CLEAR TOP YES NO DEXEC ID SIZE 1KBYTE REMAIN 100 STANDBY STATUS The message CLEAR DATA OK YES NO appears In this case the mar
202. ize Item Setting IRIS VAR WIDTH The width of the window IRIS VAR HEIGHT The height of the window IRIS VAR H POS The position of the window in the horizontal direction IRIS VAR V POS The position of the window in the vertical direction 6 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF The menu display disappears from the viewfinder screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen Countering problems with very bright highlights If the subject is too bright the iris may close too much leaving the overall image dark or the highlights may be blown out In such cases setting the highlight clip function to ON reduces the luminance range avoiding problems from the automatic iris correction In the AUTO IRIS page of the USER menu set the CLIP HIGH LIGHT item to ON Adjusting the Audio Level 4 4 Adjusting the Audio Level Setting the AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 switches to AUTO automatically adjusts the input levels of the audio signal to be recorded in audio channels 1 and 2 You can also adjust the audio level manually For the audio level of the signal to be recorded in audio channels 3 and 4 The input levels of audio channels CH 3 and CH 4 are automatically adjusted Also you can adjust them manually by setting AUDIO SELECT CH3 and or AUDIO SELECT CH4 to MANU on the AUDIO 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu When the CH 1 2 CH 3 4 sw
203. jeq pue s ejds q nue g Je deyo HAI 104 6 Push the MENU knob 7 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF CvpFileEditor The HDW F900R supports CvpFileEditor Version 2 1 or later If the version of your CvpFileEditor is an earlier version you can download the software from the eCSite the site for downloading business and professional software from Sony Corporation If you have not registered on in eCSite access the following URL and register https www ecspert sony biz ecsite center registUserInfo action regulationsDirect For detailed information on how to install the software refer to the manual for CvpFileEditor available on the site Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Standard Settings 5 4 Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Standard Settings You can return all settings in the USER menu to the standard settings 1 Holding down the MENU knob set the MENU ON OFF switch from OFF to ON The TOP menu appears 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to FILE then push the MENU knob If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page appears If the menu has been used before the page accessed last appears 3 If the CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to USER FILE then push the MENU knob If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the USER FILE page appears then push the MENU knob
204. k the file ID is saved to the Memory Stick together with the data Set the file ID before saving data in the Memory Stick Otherwise the file ID is not saved with the other data On the USER FILE page turn the MENU knob to move the mark to F ID 13OUSER FILE TOP USER FILE LOAD EXEC USER FILE SAVE EXEC F ID OOOO0000000000000 USER PRESET H EXEC 2 Push the MENU knob A character table appears allowing you to select characters you want to enter Follow the procedure of steps 4 and 5 described in 5 2 8 Setting the Shot ID page 89 to enter the file ID When you finish entering the file ID turn the MENU knob to move the mark to END then push the MENU knob The entered file ID is now displayed 1SOUSER FILE TOP USER FILE LOAD EXEC USER FILE SAVE D EXEC DOOOOOOO000000000 USER PRESET File ID set in step 3 After setting the file ID follow the procedure from step 3 in 6 1 2 Saving USER Menu Data User File to the Memory Stick page 107 The set file ID is saved in the Memory Stick with the data Selecting the display contents You can select the contents of the file to be displayed on the USER SAVE page and USER LOAD page P01 to P19 1 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to DISPLAY MODE then push the MENU knob Turn the MENU knob to move the mark until the desired type of the display contents see the following
205. k is displayed next to NO and NO blinks Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to YES YES blinks then push the MENU knob The data recorded on the memory label is cleared 100 appears on the REMAIN line e When the memory label is protected from accidental erasure you cannot clear recorded data e The time code data is cleared However the memory label ID is not affected Recording the Recording Start Time Code onto the Memory Label Tele File 3 5 Freezing a Picture During Playback Pressing the STOP button during playback stops playback and freezes the picture The VTR MODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu allows you to set the freeze frame mode where you can view the frozen picture during playback Performing the settings required for freezing the picture 1 Follow steps 1 to 4 in Setting for recording good shot marks on the LTC UBIT area on the tape page 39 to display the VTR MODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu 1Q0OUTR MODE REC TALLY BLINK ON REC START BEEP OFF LCD DISPLAY HOLD TIMER L LD TIMER 1H STOP KEY FREEZE 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to STOP KEY FREEZE then push the MENU knob 1O0OUTR MODE REC TALLY BLINK REC START BEEP LCD DISPLAY HOLD LCD HOLD TIMER SHOT TIME DISP VIDEO OUT F R STBY OFF TIMER STOP KEY FREEZE The mark on the left of STOP KEY FREEZE changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the sett
206. ke note of the following points which are common to Single Trigger mode and Continuous Trigger mode Differences are clearly noted if any Time code In Manual Interval Rec mode the internal time code generator runs in R RUN mode regardless of how the F RUN SET R RUN switch is set Audio Audio signals are not recorded in Manual Interval Rec mode 49 Recording yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey g saydeyp WHI yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey E Ja deyo HAI 50 Cassette control buttons While recording in Single Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec the green TALLY indicator in the viewfinder flashes 2 flashes second you cannot use the cassette control buttons REW F FWD PLAY and STOP Note that the camcorder stops recording in the single trigger mode of the Manual Interval Rec mode if you press the EJECT button While recording in Continuous Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec the TALLY indicator green flashes 4 flashes second you cannot use the cassette control buttons EJECT REW F FWD PLAY and STOP To stop recording press the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens However the tape may run to record the picture data stored in the memory before stopping the manual interval recording Menu operation In Single Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec you cannot change the settings of CACHE INTVAL REC and NUMBER OF FRAME on the FUNCTION 1 page after the camcorder starts recording To change the settings stop recordi
207. knob to move the mark to the page number then push the MENU knob When the mark is positioned on the left side of the item and a mark is positioned on the left of the setting push the MENU knob once to remove the setting mode Then turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the page number then push the MENU knob gt 020FUNCTION 1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt TOP OFF ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt OFF TURBO SW TURBO MONO DF FRONT MIC SELECT Dr ANDE D SEARCH OFF CACHE INTVAL REC OFF Or push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to ESCAPE when the mark is placed at a position of items other than the page number A mark appears in front of the page number The camcorder is now in page selecting mode 2 Turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears 3 Push the MENU knob when the desired page appears To end menu operations You can end menu operations using one of the following two methods e Turn the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF e Close the switch cover of the menu operating section When you close the switch cover the MENU ON OFF switch is set to OFF automatically The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen when the viewfinder DISPLAY switch is set to ON or the VF DISP item on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu is set to ON For details of the viewfinder display see 5 2 2 Selecting
208. layed for about 3 seconds 3 2 4 Recording a Recording Start Mark You can record a recording start mark at the beginning of the recording Using recording start marks enables quick access to the marked points for efficient editing For detailed information on recording start marker operations refer to the manual supplied with your VTR You can set whether or not recording start marks are recorded using the SHOT MARKER page of the MAINTENANCE menu For detailed information on setting whether or not recording start markers are recorded see Setting for recording good shot marks on the LTC UBIT area on the tape on page 39 3 2 5 Starting a Shoot with a Few Seconds of Pre Stored Picture Data Picture Cache Function with the HKDW 703 By installing an optional HKDW 703 extension board in the camcorder the camcorder is able to constantly store a few seconds up to 8 seconds of the most current picture and sound data in the board s memory As aresult when you press the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens the recording starts with the data stored a few seconds before Setting the Picture Cache time Picture Cache mode To record in Picture Cache mode you need to turn on Picture Cache mode and set the picture data storage time Picture Cache time using the USER menu The Picture Cache time and VTR SAVE STBY switch settings determine the number of seconds of picture data that will be stored in memor
209. lect that page The mark moves to ADJUST TIME DATE page O2OTIME DATE ADJUST HOUR MIN SEC YEAR MONTH DAY 4 Push the MENU knob The TIME ADJUST setting window appears TIME ADJUST ESC Item Description HOUR Sets the hour value MIN Sets the minutes value SEC Sets the seconds value YEAR Sets the year MONTH Sets the month DAY Sets the day Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item you want to set then push MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob to display the desired value then push the MENU knob The mark returns to a gt mark and the mark returns to a mark To continue the remaining settings repeat steps 5 and 6 When you finish making settings turn the MENU knob to move the mark to OK then push the MENU knob The internal clock is set with the date and time set in steps 5 to 7 The TIME DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears again The time set on the TIME ADJUST setting window is displayed To cancel the setting Before executing step 8 move the mark to ESC at the top right of the window then push the MENU knob Alternatively push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE side All settings or changes are discarded and the TIME DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears 5 3 7 Selecting a
210. lows 1 Loosen the screw and open the microphone holder clamp Clamp of the Microphone holder 2 Place the microphone in the microphone holder Place the microphone in the holder so that UP is at the top lt Tighten the screw 3 Plug the microphone cable into the MIC IN connector then set the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 and or CH4 switch es for the desired recording channel to FRONT or F Connect to the MIC IN connector Recording stereo sound You can record either stereo sound or monaural sound using the supplied stereo microphone To record stereo sound To record the L and R audio signals of stereo sound in channels 1 and 2 set both AUDIO IN CH 1 and CH 2 switches to FRONT To record the L and R audio signals of stereo sound in channels 3 and 4 set both AUDIO IN CH 3 and CH 4 switches to F Confirm that FRONT MIC SELECT on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu is set to STEREO At the factory the function of FRONT MIC SELECT is assigned to ASSIGN 2 slide type Slide the ASSIGN 2 switch to the front lens side If you have removed the FRONT MIC SELECT function from the ASSIGN 2 switch set FRONT MIC SELECT to STREO on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu STREO is selected at the factory To record monaural sound Set the appropriate AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 and or CH 4 switch es corresponding to the channel s to which you want to record to
211. ma _ 103 USER menu 75 USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu 75 V V MODULATION 150 VANCRX 160 Vertical smear 136 VF DISP 1 142 VF DISP 1 page 84 VF DISP 2 142 VF DISP 2 page 84 VF SETTING 144 VF SETTING page 88 Viewfinder 22 detaching 118 Viewfinder front rear positioning lever 23 Viewfinder left right positioning ring 23 Viewfinder position 117 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket 118 Viewfinder stopper 23 VTR MODE 156 VTR operation status and status indicators 33 VTR SAVE indicator 34 VTR SAVE STBY switch 26 VTR START button 26 W Warning indicator 34 WARNING indicator 32 WHITE 147 WHITE BAL switch 24 White balance 60 White flecks 136 WHITE page 95 WHITE SHADING 152 WRR 855A 855B_ 123 WRR 861 862 123 Z ZEBRA switch 22 Index g HHI 169 The material contained in this manual consists of information that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this manual Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described in this manual without the express written permission of Sony Corporation AEn Sony Corporation SY 3 991 855 01 1 http www sony net 2006
212. n it takes about 4 seconds before recording starts e If the VTR SAVE STBY switch is in the STBY position recording starts immediately However just after the switch position is changed from SAVE to STBY it takes about 4 seconds before recording starts If you turn off the power during a recording pause 1 Tum onthe power again 2 Press the RET button on the lens If an analog composite signal is input to the GENLOCK IN connector make sure that RETURN VIDEO page 159 is set to OFF on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu The camcorder positions the tape at the appropriate point Note however that this function works only for continuously recorded material or consecutively joined segments totaling at least 3 seconds in length 3 Press the VTR START button on the camcorder or the VTR button on the lens to start recording Continuous recording in other cases After rewinding or fast forwarding after removing the cassette or on a tape that has been partially recorded you can obtain a continuous recording by following the procedure below The End Search function also allows you to continue recording on a partially recorded tape For details see 3 2 8 Searching for the Last Recorded Portion and Turning on Recording Pause Mode End Search Function on page 51 1 Looking in the viewfinder press the PLAY button to start playback 2 Press the STOP button at the desired point to be
213. nal source is the audio equipment connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors W wireless The input signal source is an optional WRR 855A 855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit CUE IN cue track input switch Selects the input signal to be recorded on the cue track CH 1 Signal selected by the AUDIO IN CH 1 switch MIX Mixed signals selected by the AUDIO IN CH 1 and CH 2 switches CH 2 Signal selected by the AUDIO IN CH 2 switch When recording mixed signals by setting this switch to MIX be sure to confirm that the emphasis settings of the two channels on off are the same If they are different the camcorder cannot record or play back mixed signals correctly When the AES EBU format audio signal is selected the emphasis settings are determined by the channel status of the AES EBU format audio signal emphasis bit When an audio signal other than the AES EBU format audio signal is selected the emphasis setting depends on the setting of AU REC EMPHASIS page 154 on the AUDIO 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu LINE AES EBU MIC selectors Select the audio source of the audio input signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors LINE Line input audio equipment AES EBU AES EBU format audio signal MIC Microphone input If this selector is set to the MIC position and the 48V OFF switch is set to 48V and if you inadvertently connect any audio device other than a microphone to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors the de
214. nals output from the AUDIO OUT connector and EARPHONE jacks and the audio level meter in the display window also depend on the setting of this switch MONITOR switch Selects the audio monitor channels output to the earphone or speaker depending on the setting of the CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch Audio Functions 19 S 01 U0Q pUe seq JO suonouny pue suoneoogq zg sa deu9 N S 01 U09 puke Sed JO suonouny pue suopeooq z saldeu9 20 CH 1 2 MONITOR Audio output CH 3 4 switch switch position position CH 1 2 CH 1 Audio channel 1 MIX Mix sound of channels 1 and 2 CH 2 Audio channel 2 CH 3 4 CH 3 Audio channel 3 MIX Mix sound of channels 3 and 4 CH 4 Audio channel 4 MONITOR volume control Adjusts the speaker or earphone volume for sounds other than the alarm sound At the minimum position no sound can be heard ALARM volume control Adjusts the speaker or earphone alarm volume At the minimum position no sound can be heard ALARM o pP Minimum Maximum Built in speaker The speaker can be used to monitor E E sound during recording and play back sound during playback The speaker also sounds alarms to reinforce visual warnings If you connect an earphone to the EARPHONE jack the speaker is automatically muted See 8 3 Operation Warnings on page 135 for information about alarms ADVANCE SHIFT
215. nder EX is displayed when a lens extender is used 1 Variator A group of lenses that are moved to adjust the focal length Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen Color temperature This indicates the currently selected color temperature UHF wireless microphone reception level This indicates the reception level of the wireless microphone when the UHF wireless microphone is attached using four W which appear at the right of W When all four W are lit the reception is good DC IN battery voltage or remaining capacity This shows the battery voltage or remaining capacity of an internal battery pack When the power is supplied from an AC adaptor connected to the DC IN connector DC IN appears When the DISP BATT REMAIN item is set to INT or AUTO on the VF DISP 2 page of the USER menu the remaining battery capacity is automatically detected and indicated as a percentage when the Anton Bauer intelligent battery system or the BP GL65 GL95 battery pack is used The indicated value changes in steps of 10 Until the remaining battery capacity is reduced to 40 the indications MAX 90 80 40 are displayed for 3 seconds in the viewfinder each time the remaining battery capacity reduces by 10 When the remaining battery capacity is less than 40 the indication is displayed all the time When the remaining battery capacity is less than 10 the indication flashes When the remaining battery
216. nder TEST OUT connector and the HD SDI OUT connectors For PB VIDEO page 142 on the FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu set ALL HDSDI to ALL To output the recorded video signals to the HD SDI OUT connector and the camera image to the viewfinder and the TEST OUT connector For PB VIDEO page 142 on the FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu set ALL HDSDI to HDSDI HD monitor HDW F900R Y fen HD SDI input connector Video input connector 3 4 Recording the Recording Start Time Code onto the Memory Label Tele File The VTR section is compatible with the Tele File memory label system This system allows you to record the recording start time code model name serial number and tape format onto an optional MLB 1M 100 memory label Also a Tele File mark that is a rating of the images recorded just before they are recorded can be recorded onto the memory label with the recording start time code every time the unit enters the recording pause mode This is very helpful for management of the cassette tapes and to improve the efficiency of tape editing The memory label attached to the cassette is detected automatically 3 4 1 Recording the Recording Start Time Code onto the Memory Label T Insert the cassette onto which the MLB 1M 100 memory label has been attached into the camcorder Memory label Window outwards Cassette holder 2
217. new time code recorded to continue consecutively 4 5 2 Saving the Actual Time in the Time Code Setting the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to CLOCK saves the actual time in the time code When it is necessary to set the actual time use the TIME DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu For details see 5 3 6 Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock on page 98 4 5 3 Setting the User Bits By setting the user bits up to 8 hexadecimal digits you can record user information such as the date time or scene number on the time code track LIGHT WARNING HOLD button a te D LEVEL O access DATA DISPLAY SEN lous E me me 3 S PME ohz Set the DISPLAY switch to DATA Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to SET Set the DATA DISPLAY switch to U BIT A N Set the user bits by using the SHIFT and ADVANCE buttons SHIFT Selects a digit to set Each time you press the button the flashing digit moves one column to the right Pressing this button while holding down the HOLD button moves the flashing digit one column to the left ADVANCE Increments the value of the flashing digit Pressing this button while holding down the HOLD button decrements the flashing di
218. ng by pressing the EJECT button or setting the POWER switch to OFF While recording in Continuous Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec you cannot change the settings of CACHE INTVAL REC NUMBER OF FRAME and TRIGGER INTERVAL on the FUNCTION 1 page To change these settings stop recording by pressing the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens or by setting the POWER switch to OFF When the camcorder power is switched off during recording in Manual Interval Rec mode When you set the POWER switch to OFF the camcorder will switch itself off after tape access has continued for a few seconds to record the picture data stored in memory If you remove the battery unplug the DC cable or cut the power to the AC adaptor during manual interval recording picture data stored before recording stops a maximum of 5 seconds may be lost Take care when changing the battery When tape runs out during recording in Manual Interval Rec mode Note that picture data a maximum of 5 seconds at the instant the tape stopped is not recorded if the tape runs out and the camcorder stops 3 2 7 Continuous Recording on Previous Cut By assigning the RE TAKE function to the ASSIGN 1 switch you can use the ASSIGN 1 switch to position the tape at the most recent cut clear it and record the new cut Recording For detailed information see 5 3 5 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches on page 96 Continuous recording the new cut af
219. ng the Memory Stick keep it in its original case to ensure protection of important data When carrying the camcorder with the Memory Stick inserted close the cover of the menu operating section Avoid removing the Memory Stick from the insertion slot while the access indicator is lit Do not format the Memory Stick using a PC Formatting of the Memory Stick can be performed on the MEMORY STICK page of the FILE menu page 163 6 1 2 Saving USER Menu Data User File to the Memory Stick You can save USER menu settings held in the camcorder as user files in the Memory Stick You can save up to 100 user files in the Memory Stick Insert the Memory Stick then proceed as follows T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The last accessed menu page appears on the viewfinder screen 2 Tur the MENU knob until the USER FILE page appears then push the MENU knob to select the page 13OUSER FILE USER FILE LOAD EXEC USER FILE SAVE EXEC F 1D QO00000000000000 D EXEC USER PRESET If you want to set a file ID for the data to be saved Set the file ID before going to step 3 For details on setting the file ID see Setting the file ID on page 108 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to USER FILE SAVE then push the MENU knob The USER SAVE page appears Saving and Loading User Files eq Bume s sn Bulpeo 7 pue Bunes 9 Jajdey9 hhh 107 eyeq Buijes asn
220. nged by using the USER menu Itis not usually necessary to adjust the black balance when using the camcorder after it has been off for a while White balance adjustment Always readjust the white balance when the lighting conditions change Viewfinder screen displays If the black balance or white balance adjustment is started messages that report on the progress and results are displayed on the viewfinder screen when the VF DISP MODE item is set to 2 or 3 on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu For detailed information on the display mode see 5 2 3 Display Modes and Setting Change Confirmation Adjustment Progress Messages on page 85 Black balance and white balance adjustment values that are automatically set by the camcorder and the various Chapter settings are stored in the camcorder memory and retained even when the power is turned off 4 1 1 Adjusting the Black Balance Adjusting the black balance automatically In automatic black balance mode adjustments are performed in the following order clamp level black set and black balance Manual black balance adjustment can be selected from the setup menu OUTPUT DCC switch AUTO W B BAL switch T Set the OUTPUT DCC switch to CAM 2 Push the AUTO W B BAL switch to BLK and release the switch The switch returns to the center position and the adjustment is executed During adjustment the following message is displayed on
221. nish of shooting TAKE TOTAL TIME and the length of time for recording on the tape REC TIME using the USER menu e To make settings for Auto Interval Rec mode set TAKE TOTAL TIME first then REC TIME e To turn on the light automatically before recording starts set the LIGHT switch to AUTO Recording 43 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey g saydeyD WHI yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey E Ja deyo HAI To turn on Auto Interval Rec mode proceed as follows MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The last accessed menu page appears on the viewfinder screen Turn the MENU knob until the FUNCTION 1 page appears When the question mark appears at the left corner of Reeth Bl RETS Any the title page you can ASSIGN SW 29 _ OFF Hee PER Rc secr ae Turn the MENU knob DF clockwise or END NSEaRCH OFF counterclockwise to display CACHE INTVAL REC OFF the desired page P3OFUNCTIONI Push the MENU knob A gt mark appears on the left of the currently selected item and a mark appears on the left of the setting Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to CACHE INTVAL REC OSOFUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt i gt ATW ee a lt 2 gt OFF TURBO FRONT Nic SELECT STREO F NDF DF END SEARCH OFF gt CACHE INTVAL RECO OFF Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of CACHE INTVAL REC changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark OSOFUNCTION1
222. ns to Assignable Switches on page 96 HD SDI OUT connector HD SDI OUT connector TEST OUT connector REMOTE connector Shooting and recording playback functions 3 HD SDI OUT connector BNC type HD SDI OUT connector BNC type Output an HD SDI signal for a video monitor You can select whether or not the signal is output from these connectors using the OUTPUT SEL page of the USER menu When an optional HKDW 702 902R extension board is attached to the camcorder the camcorder outputs either a down converted analog composite signal color or an SD SDI signal from the HD SDI OUT connector located on the side You can select which signal is output on the OUTPUT SEL page of the USER menu For details on how to select the output signal see 5 3 2 Selecting Output Signals on page 94 TEST OUT test output connector BNC type Outputs an HD Y standard level 75 ohm terminated signal for the video monitor When an optional HKDW 702 902R extension board is attached to the camcorder you can select either a down converted analog composite signal color or an HD Y signal on the OUTPUT SEL page of the USER menu For details on how to select the output signal see 5 3 2 Selecting Output Signals on page 94 Depending on menu settings menus time code and shot data can be superimposed on the image on the monitor REMOTE connector 8 pin Connect the RM B150 B750 Remote
223. ntdeeghosaadensontetaons 123 7 5 4 Connecting Line Input Audio Equipment 124 7 6 Tripod Mounting sisccicecsiacsiicsessssceissaiseansencceteceieedeaedeeaias 125 7 7 Attaching Detaching the Shoulder Strap 0 126 7 8 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position cccssse 126 7 9 Attaching the Rain Cover Not Supplied 127 7 10 Connecting the Remote Control Unit 000 127 Table of Contents 7 Chapter 8 Maintenance 8 1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting 130 8 1 1 Preparations for Testing eeeeeeescceesneeeeeeeeeeteeeesaes 130 8 1 2 Testine the Camera creiren iei o a 130 8 1 3 Testing the VTR ideco iene e a aS 132 8 2 Maintenance 2 cccsccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseseeneessenneones 134 8 2 1 Cleaning the Video Heads sssneoensseeesseeesseessees seess 134 8 2 2 Cleaning the Viewfinder sssneeessseeesseesseessesseeesseee 134 8 3 Operation WarningS eccesssseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeteeeeneees 135 Appendixes SPECI CATIONS ssisccccecsciseres case tevnncseeeausendecesnextunceeteeecenanteated 137 RTE MC Tal oer iE o uate dda ea ets tery chat een ee ads shes 137 Video Camera Section ssis tesnsess gina seiigis 137 VTR Sections ssunodassnneno aa i 138 Recommended Additional Equipment sssssessseseseeeeseeesseee 138 MG NU DISh cose sa sesteceaetecesdieecs casassawsiantivaaadiinawtebuaneaseaastaaeedendaes 140 OP
224. o signal from the camera When this is selected you can switch DCC on and off with this selector 1 DCC Dynamic Contrast Control Against a very bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the subject objects in the background will be lost in the glare The DCC function will suppress the high intensity and restore much of the lost detail and is particularly effective in the following cases Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day Shooting a subject indoors against a background through a window eAny high contrast scene BARS DCC OFF A color bar signal is output and the DCC circuit does not operate For example use the setting for the following purposes e Adjusting the video monitor e Recording the color bar signal CAM DCC OFF The video signal from the camera is output and the DCC circuit does not operate ANdtno CAM DCC ON The video signal from the camera is output and the DCC circuit operates OUTPUT DCC switch WHITE BAL white balance memory switch Controls the white balance setting PRST preset Adjusts the color temperature corresponding to the position of the FILTER selector Use the PRST setting when you have no time to adjust the white balance A or B When the AUTO W B BAL switch is pushed to WHT the white balance is automatically adjusted according to the current position of the FILTER selector and the adjusted value is stored in either memory A or memory B
225. of an item appears to the right of the item Q1OOUTPUT SEL HD SDI OUT SD REAR BNC OUT TEST QUT SELECT DOWN CON MODE Adjustments and Settings from Menus DOWN CON Selects the conversion mode of the MODE 1 down converter from among SQEZE LETTR and CROP SQEZE The picture is displayed without distortion on a monitor with a 16 9 aspect ratio On a monitor with the 4 3 aspect ratio the picture is distorted horizontally LETTR Displays the picture without distortion on a monitor with the 4 3 aspect ratio a video signal in the 16 9 aspect ratio is output by adding a blank area no signal black top and bottom CROP By cropping both the left and right sides of a video image with the 16 9 aspect ratio a video signal with the 4 3 aspect ratio is output 1 When an optional HKDW 702 HKDW 902R is not installed these items are not displayed on the OUTPUT SEL page 2 When SDT is selected connect the HD SDI OUT connector located on the side of the camcorder to the SDI IN connector of the monitor When VBS is selected connect the HD SDI OUT connector to the VIDEO IN connector of the monitor 3 When no picture is displayed on the monitor with the TEST OUT connector feeding the monitor make sure the type of monitor HD monitor NTSC PAL monitor and the signal format of the output signal of the camcorder 1080i 525i match 4 The markers and zebra patterns are not displayed for an SD VBS signal output
226. olute values Values of object items are highlighted O 04 VF DISP 1 VF DISP OFF ON OFF See 5 2 2 Selecting Display VF DISPLAY MODE 1 2 3 3 items on page 84 DISP EXTENDER OFF ON ON DISP FILTER OFF ON ON DISP WHITE OFF ON ON DISP 5600K OFF ON ON DISP GAIN OFF ON ON DISP SHUTTER OFF ON ON DISP AUDIO OFF ON ON DISP TAPE OFF ON ON O 05 VF DISP 2 DISP IRIS OFF ON ON See 5 2 2 Selecting Display DISP ZOOM OFF ON ON tems onpage 84 DISP COLOR TEMP OFF ON OFF DISP BATT REMAIN INT VOLT AUTO INT DISP DC IN OFF ON OFF DISP WRR RF LVL OFF ON OFF DISP TIME CODE OFF ON OFF Menu List USER No Page Item Settings Default Description menu O 06 LED GAIN lt gt OFF ON ON See 5 2 4 Selecting the SHUTTER lt i gt OFF ON ON eee By eee WHITE BAL lt gt OFF ON ON 5600K lt l gt OFF ON ON ATW lt l gt OFF ON ON EXTENDER lt gt OFF ON ON FILTER lt l gt OFF ON OFF OVERRIDE lt gt OFF ON ON FORMAT lt l gt OFF ON OFF 07 LEDSTD GAIN lt gt 0dB LOW MID HIGH 0dB See 5 2 4 Selecting the SHUTTER lt I gt OFF ECS SLS OFF Lae AA HED IS 1 33 WHITE BAL lt gt P A B PA PB AB AB 5600K lt l gt OFF ON OFF ATW lt l gt OFF ON OFF EXTENDER lt gt OFF ON OFF FILTERND lt gt 1 2 3 4 1 FILTERCC lt gt A B C D B OVERRIDE lt gt OFF ON OFF FORMAT lt l gt 59 94 50i 23 98 23 98 24
227. on will be renewed according to the change of settings in the remote control data region As a result the settings of the paint data made with the remote control unit can be retained even if the remote control unit is removed However if the switch position on the remote control unit differs from the one on the camcorder the switch position on the camcorder takes precedence over that on the remote control unit For details on menu operations see 5 1 2 Basic Menu Operations on page 76 To maintain the video quality when a remote control unit is connected Set RM COMMON MEMORY to ON on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu and set all the volume values on the remote control unit to the relative volume values When a remote control unit has an absolute value switch the settings of the absolute volume switch have a priority over relative value volume settings For detailed information on how to set relative volume value settings refer to the operation manual supplied with the remote control unit Connecting the Remote Control Unit Jepioowey eu dq Bumes z saydeyo HN 129 Maintenance 8 1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting Check the functions of the camcorder before setting out for a shooting session preferably by operating the camcorder together with a color video monitor 8 1 1 Preparations for Testing soueusjuley g 4e deyo II 130 1 Attacha fully charged battery p
228. or each of A and B are stored separately from the value when WHT FILTER INH page 159 is set to OFF If the WHITE BAL switch is set to B and on the FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu the WHITE SWITCH lt B gt item is set to ATW the ATW Auto Tracing White function is activated to automatically adjust the white balance of the picture being shot for varying lighting conditions Setting the Electronic Shutter 4 2 Setting the Electronic Shutter This section describes the shutter modes that can be used with the electronic shutter of the camcorder and describes the procedure for selecting the shutter speed and shutter mode 4 2 1 Shutter Modes The shutter modes that can be used with the electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that can be selected are shown below Standard mode Use this mode for shooting fast moving subjects with little blurring Frame frequency Shutter speed sec 59 94i 1 100 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 50i 1 60 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 23 98PsF 1 32 1 48 1 50 1 60 1 96 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 24PsF 1 32 1 48 1 50 1 60 1 96 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 25PsF 1 33 1 50 1 100 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 29 97PsF 1 40 1 60 1 120 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 ECS Extended Clear Scan mode Use this mode for obtaining images with no horizontal bands of noise when shooting subjects
229. order aligning the line on the side of the battery pack with the matching line on the camcorder Back of camcorder Power Supply Chapter 2 Slide the battery pack down until its LOCK arrow yp points at the matching line on the camcorder LOCK arrow Matching line on the camcorder Holding the button in pull the battery pack up 7 1 2 Avoiding Breaks in Operation Due to an Exhausted Battery If you use both an internal battery pack attached to the camcorder and an external battery connected to the DC IN connector at the same time you can avoid breaks in operation due to dead batteries When the external battery begins to fail and an internal battery pack is also used Remove the DC output cable from the DC IN connector The power source will switch to the internal battery pack When the external battery begins to fail and an internal battery pack is not used First load the camcorder with a fully charged internal battery pack then remove the DC output cable of the external battery from the DC IN connector The power source will switch to the internal battery pack To use an external battery again connect a fully charged external battery to the DC IN connector before unloading the internal battery pack The power source will switch to the external battery Continuous operation when operating with only an internal battery pack First connect a fully charge
230. over Insert the viewfinder barrel here with the eyecup out and fasten the drawstring around the eyecup Velcro tape Velcro tape 7 10 Connecting the Remote Control Unit Connecting an optional RM B150 B750 Remote Control Unit enables remote control of the principal camera functions Connecting the remote control unit to the REMOTE connector 8 pin automatically puts the camcorder into remote control mode If you disconnect the remote control unit the remote control mode is cancelled eo PE ol eal o Osi e RM B150 B750 REMOTE connector Remote control cable Camcorder switch functions when the remote control unit is connected The following switches on the camcorder do not function e GAIN selector e OUTPUT DCC switch e WHITE BAL switch e AUTO W B BAL switch e SHUTTER selector e TURBO GAIN button ASSIGN 1 switch to which the TURBO GAIN function is assigned e VTR START button VTR button on the lens and the ASSIGN 1 or the TURBO GAIN button to which the VTR START STOP function is assigned When the VTR START STOP item on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to RM For details of the function of the VTR START button see the item Function of the VTR START button when the remote control unit is connected on page 128 Paint adjustment when the remote control unit is connected If RM COMMON MEMORY is
231. ower and consult your Manual Sony service representative TAPE Flashing 1 w DD Near the Operation Be prepared to change end of continues the cassette tape TAPE and Flashing 3 Jet ey End of Recording stops Change the cassette E tape BATT Flashing w w w D A Battery Operation Change the battery almost continues exhausted BATT and Flashing 3 Sex xX ey Battery Operation stops Change the battery E exhausted 1 During recording 2 During playback fast forward rewinding or stop 3 Additionally 5 0 appears for the tape remaining indication 4 During recording or in stop mode 5 The VTR once stops recording in auto interval recording mode Operation Warnings eoueualuley g Ja deyo 135 soueusjuleW g Jaydeyo 136 Operation error messages An operation or error message is displayed in the operation error message display area see page 83 in the viewfinder Operation error message AUTO INTERVAL M S Meaning Indicates the camera is in the Auto Interval Rec mode M S indicates the shooting interval MANU INTERVAL FRAME Indicates the camera is in the single shot mode of the Manual Interval Rec mode FRAME indicates the number of frames INTERVAL S M H FRAME Indicates the camera is in the consecutive mode of the Manual Interval Rec mode S M H indicates the trigger interval and FRAME indicates the n
232. p77 2 1 fam TEST OUT GENLOCK IN TEST OUT To another camcorder to be synchronized 1 Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page page 159 of the MAINTENANCE menu if GENLOCK is set to OFF Procedure for time code synchronization Set the POWER switch to ON Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN Set the DISPLAY switch to TC oF N a Supply a time code signal and a reference video signal complying with the SMPTE standard to the TC IN connector and to the GENLOCK IN connector respectively This operation synchronizes the internal time code generator with the external time code After about 10 seconds you can disconnect the external time code Setting the Time Data Set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to PRESET without losing the synchronization However there will be noise on the recorded image if you connect or disconnect the time code signal during recording When you finish the above procedure the internal time code is immediately synchronized with the external time code and the counter display will show the value of the external time code However wait for a few seconds until the sync generator stabilizes before recording If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the same as the frame frequency of the camcorder the camcorder neither can be correctly genlocked nor can operate correctly In such a case the internal time code is not correc
233. pe microphone External microphone AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH2 AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switch corresponding to the channel to which the microphone is connected to REAR Audio Input System Note In order for the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors on the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V power supply female XLR connectors 3 pin are fitted If the microphone cable has a female connector use an adaptor Using an external microphone attached to the camcorder You can attach an external microphone to the camcorder using the optional CAC 12 microphone holder T Remove the fixing screws for the external microphone holder 2 Attach the CAC 12 Microphone Holder Screws removed in step 1 CAC 12 3 Open the CAC 12 and remove the microphone adaptor Microphone adaptor Loosen the screw 1 Attach the microphone adaptor when using a small diameter external microphone 4 Place an electret condenser microphone such as ECM 678 in the CAC 12 Tighten the screw ECM 678 or similar 4 microphone Sy E a SSN DN 5 Set the LINE AES EBU MIC switch to MIC Set the 48 V OFF switch to 48 V if you use an external power supply type microphone Otherwise set the switch to OFF Connect the microphone cable to the AUDIO IN CH1 or AUDIO IN CH2 connector Note When you det
234. pear in the upper part to the left of the F number in the iris indication To open the iris by 1 stop Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera Two bars WE appear in the upper part to the left of the F number in the iris indication To close the iris by 0 25 stop Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camera One bar L appears in the lower part to the left of the F number in the iris indication To close the iris by 0 5 stop Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camera One bar W appears in the lower part to the left of the F number in the iris indication To close the iris by 0 75 stop Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camera Two bars OW appear in the lower part to the left of the F number in the iris indication To close the iris by 1 stop Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camera Two bars WE appear in the lower part to the left of the F number in the iris indication OOFS 6 Opening the lens iris Iris opened by 0 25 stop Iris opened by 0 5 stop Iris opened by 0 75 stop Iris opened by 1 stop Closing the lens iris Iris closed by 0 25 stop Iris closed by 0 5 stop Iris closed by 0 75 stop Iris closed by 1 stop When an optional RM B150 B750 Remote Control Unit is connected The IRIS control knob of the RM B150 B750 can be used for lens iris setting
235. pen the iris Place the flange focal length adjustment chart about 3 m 10 ft away from the camera lit well enough to provide a satisfactory video output level 3 Loosen the fixing screws on the F f or F B ring flange focal length adjustment ring 4 Use manual or power zoom to set the lens to telephoto 5 Point the camera at the chart by turning the focus ring and focus on it 6 Set the zoom ring to wide angle T Tumthe Ffor FB ring until the chart is in focus being careful not to disturb the focus ring 8 Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays in focus all the way from wide angle to telephoto 9 Tighten the Ff or F B ring fixing screws 7 5 Audio Input System 7 5 1 Using the Supplied Microphone The camcorder s MIC IN connector is an XLR 5 pin female which you can use to attach the supplied stereo microphone You can use the supplied microphone either detached from or attached to the camcorder Using the microphone detached from the camcorder Connect to the MIC IN connector Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 switches for the desired audio recording channel to FRONT or F When using the supplied microphone with an extension cable always use an external power supply type cable Using the microphone attached to the camcorder When an optional HDVF 20A HD Electronic Viewfinder is used attach the microphone as fol
236. play on the Viewfinder Screen 89 sBules pelrejeq pue shejdsiq nuaw gJeldey9 Hh sbumes paliejeq pue shejdsiq nue g Je deyo HAI 130SHOT ID SHOT IS NAME QOOOOO0O0000 QOOOOOOO0000 Oooo000000000 gt ID ID ID IDs 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the ID one of ID 1 to ID 4 you want to set then push the MENU knob The window used to enter the shot ID appears A mark appears over the first character position in the string and characters can now be input ID 1 ESC 4 BSHOT IS NAME END ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUVW XYZ 0123456789 amp O x 1 lt gt 70 RET INS DEL Enter or change the shot ID When you are entering the whole shot ID go to step Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the character that you want to change then push the MENU knob The mark changes to a mark and the character table appears The mark moves to the character table ID 1 ESC ESHOT IS NAME END 4 ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPARSTUVUW XYZ 0123456789 amp O x 1 lt gt 70 RET INS DEL Turn the MENU knob until the mark moves to the character position that you want to select then push the MENU knob Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen Example To change S to D ID 1 ESC 2 BSHOT ID NAME END Move the mark to D D appears under the ABCDEFGH I JKLMNOPQRSTUUW mark XYZ 0123456789 amp x 271 25 lt gt 78 R
237. pod Adaptor VCT 14 Rain cover Part No 3 191 064 02 Maintenance Manual Design and specifications are subject to change without notice Specifications sexipueddy 139 sexipueddy 140 Menu List In this section tables are used to briefly explain menus that the camcorder provides for adjustments and settings For menu organization and the USER menu see Chapter 5 The page number displayed on the top line of the menu may be different if an optional extension board is installed OPERATION Menu The following table lists and describes the items in the OPERATION menu Some pages of the OPERATION menu have been registered in the USER menu at the factory These pages are indicated by a circle O in the USER menu column The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to add and delete pages in the USER menu to suit your requirements When the setting range in the Settings column is surrounded by parentheses the setup value is a relative value The setting range shown on the menu screen may differ from what is shown in the manual USER No Page Item Settings Default menu O 01 OUTPUT SEL HD SDI OUT OFF ON ON SD REAR BNC OUT 2 OFF VBS SDI VBS TEST OUT SELECT HD SD HD DOWN CON MODE2 CROP SQEZE CROP LETTR Description See 5 3 2 Selecting Output Signals on page 94 Menu List USER menu No Page FUNCTION 1
238. ps advancing while time data is being set when the F RUN SET R RUN switch is set to SET For this reason if you start recording immediately after switching to F RUN or R RUN i e to a position other than SET you may overwrite a portion of the previously recorded time code e Positions of shot marks may be shifted depending on the Picture Cache time setting e Menu operation for the Picture Cache time setting is disabled during recording To change the setting once stop the recording by pressing the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens When power is lost during recording e When the power is turned off during recording the camera will switch itself off after the tape has run for a few seconds If you remove the battery pull out the DC cable or cut power to the AC adaptor during recording actual recording of picture data ends the instant the tape is stopped However a certain amount of recorded picture data equal to that recorded during the Picture Cache time will be lost because it has not yet been recorded on the tape before the tape stops For this reason make sure you do not change the battery while recording When the tape runs out during recording Please note that if the tape runs out and the camcorder stops during recording a certain amount of recorded picture data equal to that recorded during the Picture Cache time will be lost because it has not yet been recorded on the tape 3 2 6 Shooting
239. r When this connector is not being used attach the supplied XLR connector cover onto it POWER switch Turns the main power supply on and off LIGHT switch Determines how a video light connected to the LIGHT connector is turned on and off AUTO When the switch on the video light is in the on position putting the camcorder in recording mode turns the video light on automatically When using the auto interval recording mode the video light is automatically turned on immediately before recording starts MANUAL You can turn the video light on or off manually using its own switch Power Supply 17 S 01 U0Q puke seq JO suonouny pue suoneoog z sa deu9 N S 01 U09 pUe Sed JO suonouny pue suopeooq z saldeup 2 2 Accessory Attachments Shoulder pad Ts ane mount Lens cable clamp Shoulder strap posts Light shoe LIGHT connector Lens mount Lens mount lever Lens mount cap B LENS connector Shoulder strap posts Attach the supplied shoulder strap to these posts For details see 7 7 Attaching Detaching the Shoulder Strap on page 126 Light shoe Attach an optional accessory such as a video light to this shoe LIGHT connector 2 pin female Connect the cable of an Anton Bauer Ultralight System attached to the light shoe The system operates with lights powered by 12 V with a maximum power consumption of 50 W
240. r mode and speed settings on page 65 1 The SLS mode is effective only when an optional HKDW 90SR is installed The current shutter setting indication appears for about 3 seconds in the viewfinder screen Examples SS 1 250 ECS 60 00 Hz 3 Before the shutter setting indication disappears push the SHUTTER selector down to SELECT again and repeat this until the desired mode or speed appears Pushing the SHUTTER selector down to SELECT repeatedly allows you to cycle through the settings of mode and speed preselected on the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu Note that all modes and all standard mode speeds listed in the table on the previous page are preselected using the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu By factory default all available shutter modes and shutter speeds are displayed in the sequence shown in the following figure You can use the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu to make a setting so that only the desired or most frequently used modes and speeds are displayed Setting the Electronic Shutter 63 Bulpiooey 104 suas pue sjuewsnipy Jeldey9 1h Bulpsooey 10 sumes pue sjuswjsnipy y 1 dey9 HAI 64 Standard mode i 1 100 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 7 t PPA AER N EA EE E OEE ae E E J L SLS mode am ECS mode 1 These shutter speeds in the standard mode are available for 59 94i format 2 The SLS mode appears only when an opt
241. r 23 98PsF is selected this item is not displayed 4 When either 59 94 or 29 97PsF is selected the maximum setting is 7 seconds When one of 50i 25PsF 24PsF or 23 98PsF is selected the maximum setting is 8 seconds 5 When either 24PsF or 23 98PsF is selected the maximum setting is 50 MIN When either 50i or 25PsF is selected the maximum setting is 48 MIN When either 59 94i or 29 97PsF is selected the maximum setting is 40 MIN 6 The shutter speed depends on the selected frame frequency See 4 2 1 Shutter Modes on page 62 7 When either 50i or 59 94 is selected OFF is the default setting When either 23 98PsF or 24PsF is selected 1 48 is the default setting When 25PSF is selected 1 50 is the default setting When 29 97PsF is selected 1 60 is the default setting 8 When Y is selected in the camcorder with an optional HKDW 702 902R the color signal is output from the connector whose selected output signal is an SD signal Menu List PAINT Menu The following table lists and describes the items in the PAINT menu When the setting range in the Settings column is surrounded by parentheses the setup value is a relative value The setting range shown on the menu screen may differ from what is shown in the manual No Page Item Settings Default Description P01 SW STATUS GAMMA OFF ON ON Turns
242. r details see 8 3 Operation Warnings on page 135 Switch settings related to time code and displayed information DISPLAY switch position DATA DISPLAY switch position Displayed information CTL Any position Control signal TC Any position Time code DATA U BIT User bits SHOT TIME Data and time from shot data SHOT NO Not used currently zero is displayed Time code display Lights in playback mode Lights in non drop frame mode Lights when the camcorder is synchronized with an external time code Lights when the time code generator is on hold NOF EXBLK d oven ET oven rt ao v WILL Lil S10 TAPE E Mim E EEEE B BA EBB eee RF SERVO HUMID SLACK J Jeakas D Lights when the time code CTL or real time is displayed Lights when the HOLD button is pressed Time counter display Shows the time code CTL user bit data and real time 1 When the HOLD button is pressed to hold the time code value the time code is displayed in the format shown below When the HOLD button is pressed again to release the hold the time code is displayed in the normal format eee e WILL Le LIL Relationships between the DISPLAY switch and DATA DISPLAY switch settings and the time counter displays Except during setting of the time code the time counter display is determined by the position of the DISPLAY swi
243. r the auto iris detection window on and off IRIS LEVEL 99 to 99 Adjusts the level of the auto iris target value IRIS APL RATIO 99 to 99 Adjusts the mix ratio of the auto iris detection peak value and average value IRIS VAR WIDTH 20 to 479 240 Sets the width and height of the detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR IRIS VAR HEIGHT 20 to 269 135 Sets the height of the detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR IRIS VAR H POS 460 to 460 Sets the horizontal position of the detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR IRIS VAR V POS 249 to 249 Sets the vertical position of the detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR IRIS SPEED 0 1 2 3 4 5 Adjusts the auto iris operation speed CLIP HIGH LIGHT OFF ON OFF Turns the function which during auto iris adjustment ignores very bright areas by dulling the reaction to high luminescence on and off Menu List No Page Item Settings Default Description M15 FUNCTION 3 WHT FILTER INH OFF ON OFF Turns the function which inhibits independent white memory for each filter position on and off COLOR BAR SEL SMPTE 100 75 100 Selects the color bar type 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 SHT DISP MODE SEC DEG SEC Selects whether to display the s
244. red file number then push the MENU knob When the save is completed the SCENE FILE page appears again When you select a file number where data has already been saved The message OVER WRITE OK YES NO appears In this case the mark is placed on the left of NO e To stop overwriting push the MENU knob To overwrite move the mark to YES then push the MENU knob When a Memory Stick has been inserted You can use up to 20 pages from P0O1 to P20 to save scene files in the Memory Stick Each page can hold up to 5 files Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears then push the MENU knob P0O1 SCENE STORE ESC DISPLAY MODE 7 ALL 001 SCENE1 002 FEB 05 02 XXX SFILE SAVE MEM1 5S Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired file number then push the MENU knob P01 SCENE STORE DISPLAY MODE ALL 001 SCENE1 FEB 05 02 002 003 004 005 xxx 5FILE SAVE e MEMI 5 You can select the contents of the user file to be displayed on the page For details see Selecting the display contents on page 112 5 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF To return to the SCENE FILE page After the message COMPLETE is displayed move the mark to ESC at the top right of the page by turning the MENU knob then push the MENU knob White balance setting data to be saved in the scene
245. ring To store the camcorder in the carrying case Always store the camcorder with the viewfinder moved fully in the direction opposite to the barrel and the viewfinder left right positioning ring tightened Adjusting the position backward or forward EI 1 Loosen the viewfinder front rear positioning lever and the LOCK knob Adjusting the Viewfinder Japioowey y dq umes z saydeyo HH hh 117 Japiooweg ey dN Bumes z Ja deyo HAI 118 2 Adjust the viewfinder to the most convenient position for viewing by sliding it backward or forward 3 Tighten the viewfinder front rear positioning lever and the LOCK knob 7 2 2 Adjusting the Viewfinder Focus and Screen Adjusting the viewfinder focus Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the viewfinder image is sharpest Diopter adjustment ring Adjusting the viewfinder screen Adjust the brightness contrast and peaking of the viewfinder screen with the controls shown below Adjusting the Viewfinder 7 2 3 Detaching the Viewfinder Viewfinder stopper Point the viewfinder barrel up or down 2 Loosen the viewfinder left right positioning ring 3 Holding the viewfinder stopper up slide the viewfinder in the direction indicated by the arrow and detach it 4 Remove the viewfinder cable and microphone cable from the clamps and disconnect them
246. rn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the desired Tele File mark appears The Tele File mark changes in the order of OK lt gt NG gt KP Setting Contents OK When the recorded image is good NG When the recorded image is not good KP When you cannot judge whether the recorded image is good or not good or when you want to record the mark as the break of multiple shots 6 Push the MENU knob The mark to the left of TELE FILE MARK changes to a mark and the mark to the left of the setting changes to a mark T To end menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF 3 4 3 Warning Error Messages in Memory Label Operation When Tele File marks cannot be recorded correctly or may not be recorded warning error messages appear Warning messages TELE FILE MEMORY FULL e You have loaded a cassette with a memory label whose memory capacity is 0 attached e You have loaded a cassette with a memory label whose memory capacity is 0 attached and you are starting stopping the recording TELE FILE NEAR FULL The remaining capacity of the memory label is about 5 or less but Tele File marks are still correctly recorded Error messages NO TELE FILE A cassette tape without a memory label has been loaded TELE FILE FULL The remaining capacity of the memory label has reached 0 TELE FILE WRITE PROTECT The memory label is wr
247. rn the MENU knob to select whether or not to record the selected item superimposed on the color bars then push the MENU knob The mark returns to a mark and the mark returns to a mark 5 To continue setting other items repeat steps 3 and 4 6 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Carrying out superimposed recording To actually record the items selected for superimposed recording on the SHOT DISP page set the OUTPUT DCC switch to BARS The items selected for superimposed recording appear on the screen and are recorded superimposed on the color bars 5 2 8 Setting the Shot ID On the SHOT ID page of the USER menu you can set a shot ID of up to 12 alphanumeric characters spaces and symbols When the OUTPUT DCC switch is set to BARS this shot ID is output with the color bar signal The shot ID comprises ID1 to ID4 and you can select the SHOT ID to be recorded using the SHOT DISP page For detailed information on the OUTPUT DCC switch position see OUTPUT DCC output signal dynamic contrast control switch on page 24 When the menu is displayed the shot ID is not displayed even if the color bar signal is output ESCAPE switch MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The menu page accessed last appears on the screen 2 Turn the MENU knob until the SHOT ID page appears then push the MENU knob to select the page Status Dis
248. ront rear direction loosen this lever and the LOCK knob After adjustment retighten this lever and the LOCK knob Viewfinder left right positioning ring Loosen this ring to move the viewfinder sideways Camera operator tally indicator Lights while the camcorder is recording Slide the window open when you shoot with your eye away from the viewfinder This indicator flashes when the battery level is running low or the tape is almost full Viewfinder stopper Pull up this stopper to detach the viewfinder from the camera LOCK knob To adjust the viewfinder position in the front rear direction loosen this knob and the viewfinder front rear positioning lever After adjustment retighten this knob and the viewfinder front rear positioning lever FILTER selector ASSIGN 1 2 switches SHUTTER selector AUTO W B BAL switch TURBO GAIN button WHITE BAL switch OUTPUT DCC switch GAIN selector Shooting and recording playback functions 2 FILTER selector Selects the most appropriate filter to match the light source illuminating the subject When this selector is used with the display mode set to 3 the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds e g ND 1 CC B The relationships between the selector settings and filter selections as well as examples of filters for different shooting conditions are as follows FILTER selector outer knob sett
249. ruEye is a trademark of Sony Corporation Wide range of menu settings The menus provide a wide variety of operations and settings including e Status display message and marker display settings e Camera adjustment settings e Assignable switch function assignment e Memory Stick operations You can assign any settings toa USER menu to create customized menus 1 Memory Stick is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation Saving and recalling settings from a Memory Stick Using an optional Memory Stick you can save menu settings for particular shooting conditions for recall as required Down converter 2 3 pull down function e Attaching an optional HKDW 702 extension board converting to a 525 59 94i and 625 50i signal allows you to monitor the camera image and playback image in 1080 59 941 1080 50i 1080 29 97PsF and 1080 25PsF formats on an NTSC PAL monitor Attaching an optional HKDW 902R extension board which has 2 3 pull down conversion function allows you to monitor the Features eer HMI M JM AO Je deyo 12 camera image and playback image in 1080 23 98PsF and 1080 59 94i format on an NTSC monitor e These optional boards make it possible to output an SDI signal corresponding to Embedded Audio e Three down conversion modes are available SQEZE LETTR BOX and CROP Slow shutter mode function Installing an optional HKDW 905R extension board enables the c
250. s on page 109 Saving and Loading User Files 6 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen USER menu settings to be saved in the Memory Stick Settings for items on all pages of the USER menu are saved in the Memory Stick as a user file However you can select saved data that are not to be loaded from the Memory Stick by using the items LOAD CUSTOM DATA LOAD OUT OF USER BEFORE FILE PAGE and USER LOAD WHITE on the USER FILE2 page of the FILE menu If data cannot be saved If one of the following error messages appears during or after the save operation then the data was not saved Data save error messages Error message Cause Action NO MEMORY No Memory Insert or reinsert the STICK flashing Stick is inserted Memory Stick Set the LOCK switch to the write enable position MEMORY STICK The LOCK LOCKED switch on the Memory Stick is set to the write protect position MEMORY STICK Circuit or ERROR Memory Stick flashing fault Check the circuitry or replace the Memory Stick Setting the file ID Before data is saved to a Memory Stick it is useful to set a file ID for the Memory Stick to identify it When data is saved to a Memory Stic
251. s of the same white balance channel repeat steps 5 and 6 To set the other white balance channel go back to step 4 T To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Note When using the OFFSET WHITE function is displayed as the WARM color temperature indication and is displayed as the COOL temperature indication in the viewfinder 5 3 5 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches You can assign the desired function to the ASSIGN 1 2 switches and the TURBO GAIN button T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The menu page accessed last appears on the viewfinder screen 2 Turn the MENU knob until the FUNCTION 1 page appears then push the MENU knob to select the page The current setting of each item appears on the right of the item O2OFUNCTION1 SASSIGN SW lt 1 gt 0 ASSIGN_SW lt 2 gt TURBO SW TURBO ERONT eur SELECT STEREO ENO NBEARCH CACHE INTUAL REC Item Description ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt Assigns the function to ASSIGN 1 push type switch ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt __ Assigns the function to ASSIGN 2 slide type switch TURBO SW Assigns the function to the TURBO GAIN button 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item corresponding to the switch to which you want to assign the function then push the MENU knob The corresponding ASSIGN SW window appears ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt window 4 gt 4 gt ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ES
252. s the monaural stereo switch MONO function when a stereo microphone is STEREO connected to the MIC IN connector Q o PICTURE Assigns the Picture Cache mode ON 3 CACHE OFF function a ON OFF 1 z TEST OUT Assigns the function for switching z CHARACTER whether or not the characters are mixed F with the video signal to be output from D the TEST OUT connector 3 MARKER Assigns the ON OFF function for a displaying all markers F 5 ZEBRA Assigns the zebra pattern display ey function g UA01 to Assigns the items assigned in the 5 UA10 2 ASSIGN EDIT page 1 The assigned function is effective only when an optional HKDW 703 is installed 2 This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the ASSIGN EDIT page For functions that are assigned to the ASSIGN 2 slide type switch you cannot change those settings using other menus The function assigned to the ASSIGN 2 switch takes precedence over the menu setting Function Description OFF Disables the switch F MIC Assigns the monaural stereo switch MONO function when a stereo microphone is STEREO connected to the MIC IN connector PICTURE Assigns the Picture Cache mode ON CACHE OFF function ON OFF TEST OUT Assigns the function for switching CHARACTER whether or not text is superimposed on the video signal to be output from the TEST OUT connector MARKER Assigns the ON OFF function for displaying all markers RE TAKE Assign the RE
253. s the resettable meters 2 DRUM RUNNING Displays the total time the drum has rotated TAPE RUNNING Displays the accumulated time the tape has run OPERATION Display the time that the unit has been powered on THREADING Displays the number of times of tape threading DRUM RUNNING 2 Displays the total time the drum has rotated reset possible TAPE RUNNING 2 Displays the accumulated time the tape has run reset possible OPERATION 2 Displays the times that the unit has been powered on reset possible THREADING 2 Displays the number of times of tape threading reset possible D02 TIME DATE ADJUST See 5 3 6 Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock on page HOUR 78 MIN SEC YEAR MONTH DAY D03 ROM VERSION AT Ver X XX Displays the ROM version SS Ver X XX FP Ver X XX AU DSP Ver X XX EQ Ver X XX D04 DEV STATUS Te LSI NVRAMAM Displays the self diagnosis D05 OPTION BOARD DOWN CONVERTER PICTURE CACHE SLOW SHUTTER Displays the installed options Menu List About a Memory Stick What is Memory Stick Memory Stick is a new compact portable and versatile IC Integrated Circuit recording medium with a data capacity that exceeds a floppy disk Memory Stick is specially designed for exchanging and sharing digital data among Memory Stick compatible products Beca
254. s z Ja deyo HAI 120 7 3 Mounting the Lens For information about using the lens refer to the lens manual T Push the lens mount lever upward and remove the lens mount cap from the lens mount 2 Align the center slot in the lens mount with the center pin on the lens and insert the lens into the mount 3 Holding the lens in place push the lens mount lever downward to mount the lens If the lens is not firmly locked it may come off while the camcorder is being used This could cause a serious accident Make sure the lens is firmly locked 4 Connect the lens cable to the LENS connector Connecting a cable to the LENS connector while in powered status may cause a malfunction or damage the unit Turn off the power before you make a connection with the LENS connector 5 Secure the lens cable with the cable clamps Mounting the Lens Adjusting the Flange Focal Length 7 4 Adjusting the Flange Focal Length If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you zoom from telephoto to wide angle adjust the flange focal length the distance from the plane of the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane Make this adjustment after mounting or changing the lens Adjusting the flange focal length The position of the controls for adjusting the flange focal length vary somewhat from lens to lens Check the identification of the various controls in the lens manual T Set the iris to manual 2 O
255. ssing this button while holding down the HOLD button decrements the flashing digit To reset the time code value to 00 00 00 00 Press the RESET button Setting the Time Data 5 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN or R RUN F RUN Free run The time code generator keeps running R RUN Recording run The time code generator runs only while recording To set drop frame mode non drop frame mode You can select the drop frame DF mode or non drop frame NDF mode on the FUNCTION 1 page page 141 of the OPERATION menu or on the TIMECODE page page 156 of the MAINTENANCE menu This function is effective only when the 59 941 and 29 97PsF frame frequency is selected To make the time code consecutive When the F RUN SET R RUN switch is set to R RUN recording a number of scenes on the tape normally produces consecutive time code However once you remove the tape and record on another tape the time code will no longer be contiguous when you use the original tape again for recording In this case to make the time code consecutive proceed as follows T Set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to REGEN 2 Use the PLAY button to play back 3 Watching the playback find the point of the previous recording on the tape from which you wish to continue recording then push the STOP button 4 Press the RET button on the lens This reads the previous recording and synchronizes the internal time code generator as a result allowing the
256. ssseee 14 1 3 PRECAUTIONS iii ssccsscsccese cies easenarccccdesideeiseciectesiavetsadasences 15 1 4 Using the CD ROM Manual ccccsssseeeeeeeeeseseeeeees 15 1 4 1 Preparations sige cdisusssesashosuaseieenaeds Wiad savtraveracdesessousaawevsanes 15 1 4 2 Reading the CD ROM Manual eee eeeceeeeeeeesteeeeees 15 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2 1 P wer Supply vsvivsveceidesscseseseectatetnececieetnecndhescvetcisteteaacus 17 2 2 Accessory Attachments nnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 18 2 3 Audio FUNGHONS wiiciciscccissensscusacawencwessecidususdcacanadtiteenteccue 19 2 4 Shooting and Recording Playback Functions 22 2 5 Menu Operating Section ccccccsssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 27 2 6 Time Code System ccsssseeeeeeeessseeeeeeeesesseeneeeeeeeees 29 2 7 Warnings and Indications ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 31 2 8 Warnings and Indications on the Display Panel 32 2 9 Indicators in the Viewfinder cc ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 34 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3 1 About Cassettes ssecccccecsssseeeeeeeesseneeeeeeeeeeseesseeeeeeeeees 35 3 1 1 Loading and Unloading a Cassette 00 0 eeeeeeseeeeeees 35 3 1 2 Preventing Accidental Erasure eeceesceseseeeeeteeeeeees 36 3 2 Recording cevesinvisnsceeecavetninrnsensitnsewediwinsiwvindeneienswenndscasezuns 37 3 2 1 Basie Procedures waicic yceesrcastinnteetac isch eee aa 37
257. switch the shutter mode from SS mode to SLS mode the picture may blur When you switch the OUTPUT DCC switch from BARS to CAM the picture may blur only when 50i format is selected If a larger number of frames is selected in SLS mode in a high temperature situation a flicker may appear on the picture If you switch the GAIN selector position noise may appear For detailed information consult your Sony dealer Changing the range of choice of shutter mode and speed settings You can reduce the time required to select whether you use the ECS mode and the speed by narrowing the choice of settings in advance This can be done by using the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu e The SLS mode can be selected only when an optional HKDW 905R extension board is installed e When controlling the camcorder by connecting an optional Remote Control Unit such as RM B150 B750 you can select all shutter speeds and ECS mode regardless of the setting on the SHT ENABLE page MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON while holding down the MENU knob The TOP menu appears lt TOP MENU gt USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE OPERATION e MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to OPERATION Push the MENU knob If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the OPERATION menu appears If the menu has been use
258. t 40MIN gt 50MIN gt 1H gt 2H lt gt 3H gt 4H gt 6H gt 12H gt 24H When a trigger interval time other than M is displayed the camcorder is in Continuous Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec The TALLY indicator green flashes 1 flash second 3 Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of setting returns to a mark and the mark on the left of TRIGGER INTERVAL returns to an mark 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to PRE LIGHTING O3SOFUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt TU TURBO FRONT MIC SELECT STREO DF NDF DF END SEARCH OFF CACHE INTVAL REC M INT NUMBER OF FRAME 1 TRIGGER INTERVAL 1SEC PRE LIGHTING OFF 5 Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of PRE LIGHTING changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 6 Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the desired time interval at which to turn on the light before recording starts appears If you turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise the PRE LIGHTING time changes in the following sequence OFF 2SEC 5SEC gt 10SEC To turn on the light automatically before recording starts by setting the PRE LIGHTING item to ON be sure to set the LIGHT switch to AUTO Also set the switch of the light connected to the LIGHT connector to ON The light automatically turns on and off in Continuous Trigger mode of Manual Inter
259. t could not be completed TIME LIMIT within the standard number of attempts ABB NG The difference between the reference R or Gor B value and the current value is so great OVERFLOW that it exceeds the range Adjustment was impossible If any of the above error messages is displayed retry the black balance adjustment Keep pushing the AUTO W B BAL to BLK until BLACK SET appears after BLACK BALANCE appears If the error message occurs again contact your Sony service representative If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS connector it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris If this happens the black balance will be incorrect Black balance memory Values stored in memory are held until the black balance is adjusted again 4 1 2 Adjusting the White Balance Adjusting the white balance automatically When you make automatic white balance adjustments the adjustment value obtained is saved in memory 1 Set the switches and selectors as shown in the following figure Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance If the setting of the GAIN selector or WHITE BAL switch is changed a message reporting the new setting position appears for about 3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen Set the FILTER selector to suit the lighting conditions as follows FILTER selector outer knob setting and CC filter
260. t the beginning of a cassette After performing the basic procedures for shooting and recording following the instructions in 3 2 1 Basic Procedures on page 37 secure the camcorder so that it will not move 2 Push the VTR START button on the camcorder or the VTR button on the lens The camcorder starts recording in Continuous Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec and the flashing cycle of the TALLY indicator green changes from 1 flash second to 4 flashes second and the message INTERVAL SEC FRAME flashes on the viewfinder screen When you use the PRE LIGHTING function the light turns on when you press the VTR START button After the preset PRE LIGHTING time has elapsed the camcorder captures the picture in the memory The camcorder stores picture data about 5 seconds worth in memory and then actually records the stored picture data on the tape As a result the tape runs intermittently The REC indicator in the viewfinder is on while the camcorder is capturing the picture in the memory To stop recording in Continuous Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec You can stop recording in Continuous Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec using the following two methods However the tape may continue to run to record the picture data stored in the memory at the instant the tape stopped e Press the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens e Set the POWER switch to OFF Notes on Manual Interval Rec operation Ta
261. ta are not recorded COUNTRY CODE When you select COUNTRY CODE the character table appears Enter an abbreviated alphanumeric string 4 byte alphanumeric strings according to the values defined in ISO 3166 1 There are about 240 country codes Find your own country code on the following home page Refer to ISO 3166 1 http www din de gremien nas nabd iso3 166ma cod stp1 en_listp1 html For detailed information on how to enter characters follow steps 3 to 6 in 5 2 8 Setting the Shot ID on page 89 When the country code is less than 4 bytes the active part of the code will occupy the first part of the 4 bytes and the remainder must be filled with the space character 20h Example In the case of Japan For Japan if the country code is JP it is 2 bytes if JPN it is 3 bytes As a result enter the following JP__ or JPN _ where _ represents a space Adjustments and Settings from Menus sBules pelrejeq pue shejdsiq nuaw g Je deyo A 101 sBumes paliejeq pue sfejdsiq nue g Je deyo HAI 102 ORGANIZATION organization code When you select this item the character table appears Enter an abbreviated 4 byte alphanumeric string for the organization code Note There are no problems in recording or playing back audio video signals if ORGANIZATION is not set Organization codes must be acquired by applying to the SMPTE registration office If no organization code has been acquired it is forbidden to ent
262. tart recording and set the camcorder to recording pause mode by pushing the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens 2 Push the ASSIGN 1 switch or the TURBO GAIN button to which the TELE FILE MARK function is assigned The mark to be recorded appears on the viewfinder When you record a Tele File mark for the first time after you turn on the power of the camcorder the mark selected on the menu appears For details see Setting the Tele File mark to be recorded for the first time after power on on page 54 TELE FILE MARK When OK is selected on the menu This message disappears after 3 seconds The mark displayed when it disappears from the viewfinder is recorded with the recording start time code Message TELE FILE MARK OK Meaning States that an OK mark has been recorded States that an NG mark has been recorded TELE FILE MARK NG Message TELE FILE MARK KP Meaning States that a KP mark has been recorded States that the Tele File mark recorded on that shot has been cancelled TELE FILE MARK ERASE If the mark displayed on the viewfinder is different from the desired one Push the ASSIGN 1 switch several times while the mark is displayed until the appropriate mark appears on the viewfinder The mark changes in the order of OK NG KP gt ERASE If the display disappears before you select the appropriate mark Continue pushing the
263. tch and DATA DISPLAY switch For details of setting the time code menu operation see 4 5 1 Setting the Time Code on page 72 Warnings and Indications on the Display Panel 33 S 01 U09 pue Sed Jo suoouN4 pue suoyeo07 Z Ja deyO I 2 9 Indicators in the Viewfinder Several indicators are provided above and below the viewfinder screen to indicate the current state and adjustments of the camera S 01 U09 pUe Sed JO suonouny pue suoneooq z saldeup TALLY indicator REC indicators BATT indicator ALLY REC B o _ Viewfinder screen indicator f VTR SAVE indicator VTR SAVE TALLY green tally indicator Lights in green when the camcorder is in Picture Cache mode Also this indicator blinks in green when the camcorder is in auto Interval Rec mode or manual Interval Rec mode When HD SDI REMOTE I F page 159 is set to G TLY on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu this indicator lights in green when the HDW 250 S280 connected to the HD SDI OUT connector starts recording Note When HD SDI REMOTE I F page 159 is set to G TLY on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu this indicator does not light in green even in Picture Cache mode REC recording red tally indicators Light in red during recording They also warn by flashing For more information see 8 3 Operation W
264. ter taking out the cassette Although the cassette compartment lid is not locked turning on the power makes the cassette lid operable again About Cassettes 3 1 2 Preventing Accidental Erasure The following procedure prevents cassettes from being recorded inadvertently Push the plug in To reuse the cassette return the plug to its original position 3 2 Recording 3 2 1 Basic Procedures This section describes the basic procedures for shooting and recording Before a shooting session ensure that the camcorder is functioning properly For details see 8 1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting on page 130 From turning on the camcorder to loading a cassette T Attacha fully charged battery pack For details see 7 1 Power Supply on page 116 2 Set the POWER switch to ON Check that the HUMID indicator does not appear and that the battery power level is sufficient If HUMID indicator appears wait until it disappears After turning off the power check whether the drum is dry even if the HUMID indicator is off with visual inspection when turning on the power again 3 Check that there are no obstructions near the cassette lid then push the EJECT button to open the cassette lid 4 After checking the points below load the cassette and close the cassette lid e The cassette is not write protected e There is no slack in the tape
265. ter the cut before the most recent cut Tape running direction Cut 1 Cut 2 Cut 3 Cut 4 Example After recording cut 3 clearing cut 3 and recording cut 4 after cut 2 1 Press the button on the lens while holding the ASSIGN 1 switch down in the above example with the camcorder in the recording pause mode after recording the cut 3 The camcorder automatically positions the tape at the end point of cut 2 and turns in the recording pause mode 2 Record cut 4 Cut 4 is recorded after cut 2 e When pictures consisting of cuts recorded using the RE TAKE function are played back on a VTR for professional use the CHANNEL CONDITION indicator which indicates the condition of the played back signal of the VTR may be lit in yellow noise may be added to the cue audio for the first 2 or 3 seconds or the previously recorded timecode may be displayed for a few seconds To avoid this it is recommended that you make the first part of the cut in the above Example After recording cut 3 clearing cut 3 and recording cut 4 after cut 2 cut 4 about 3 seconds longer In the following cases the RE TAKE function is not accepted The message INVALID OPERATION is displayed on the viewfinder screen for three seconds When only one cut has been recorded When the length of the recorded cuts is less than 3 seconds When Picture Cache is ON The RE TAKE function is also not accepted after recor
266. ter which the TC display is to be turned off after power off when LCD DISPLAY HOLD is set to TIMER H hours SHOT TIME DISP MD HM DM HM D HMS MD HM Selects the format of the time to be displayed on the LCD MD HM Month day hour minute DM HM Day month hour minute D HMS Day hour minute second VIDEO OUT F R EE PB EE Selects the video output signal during FF REW EE Input signal PB Playback signal STBY OFF TIMER OFF S5MIN 1OMIN 30MIN 60MIN 60MIN Sets the length of time for the stand by off timer when the VTR SAVE STBY switch is set to STBY STOP KEY FREEZE OFF FRAME FIELD OFF Selects the type of frozen picture to be used when the recorded video signal is stopped by pushing the STOP button during playback Menu List No Page Item Settings Default Description M11 SHOT MARKER LTC UB MARKER _ SET ALL OFF SET Sets whether to write the markers in UBIT of LTC or not SET To independently select the ON OFF setting of the following items REC START MARK SHOT MARK 1 and SHOT MARK 2 ALL To write REC START MARK SHOT MARK 1 and SHOT MARK 2 all OFF None are written REC START MARK OFF ON OFF Turns REC START MARK on off SHOT MARKER 1_ OFF ON OFF Turns SHOT MARK 1 on off SHOT MARKER 2_ OFF ON OFF Turns SHOT MARK 2 on off M12 PRESET WHT COLOR TEMP lt P gt Display color 32
267. that from the TEST OUT connector on the camcorder Use the black cable supplied with the RM B150 B750 to connect the monitor to the MONITOR connector on the RM B150 B750 When the remote control unit is disconnected from the camcorder The camcorder settings return to the settings in effect before the remote control unit was connected By making a menu setting the setting of the paint adjustment made with the remote control unit can be retained even after the remote control unit is removed from the camcorder For details see Structure of the paint adjustment data below Structure of the paint adjustment data The non volatile memory of the camcorder used for storing paint adjustment data consists of two regions as shown below one is the independent data region that is used when a remote control unit is not connected and the other is the remote control data region that is used when aremote control unit is connected Paint adjustment data is automatically selected and output to the hardware of the Connecting the Remote Control Unit camcorder depending on whether or not a remote control unit such as the RM B150 B750 is connected Non volatile memory Independent data region MASTER BLACK MASTER GAMMA Setup KNEE POINT menu of the DETAIL LEVEL camcorder R B GAIN R B BLACK r Hardware of the camera Remote control data RM B150 region B750 MASTER BLACK MASTER GAMMA KNEE P
268. that the speaker volume changes accordingly Connect an earphone to the front or rear EARPHONE jack Check that the speaker sound is cut off and that you can hear the sound from the microphone in the earphone Turn the MONITOR volume control and check that the earphone volume changes accordingly Connect the earphone to the other EARPHONE jack Check the earphone as in step 3 5 Testing external microphones 1 Set the LINE AES EBU MIC selector that corresponds to the channel to which the external microphone will be connected in step 2 to MIC and set the 48 V OFF switch as follows e If the connected microphone has an internal power supply set the switch to OFF e If the connected microphone has an external power supply set the switch to 48V Connect an external microphone to either the AUDIO IN CH1 or AUDIO IN CH2 connector Set the AUDIO IN switch that corresponds to the channel to which the external microphone is connected to REAR Aim the microphones at a sound source Check that the audio level meter in the display panel and the audio level indicators in the viewfinder reflect the changing sound level 6 Checking the user bit and time code functions Set the user bits as required For the operation see 4 5 3 Setting the User Bits on page 73 Set the time code For the operation see 4 5 1 Setting the Time Code on page 72 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to R RUN Press th
269. the four screws placed in the tuner fitting For three of these screws insert the screwdriver through the corresponding hole and tighten the screw Loosen the adjustment screws Adjust the tuner fitting position for a battery pack to be attached and tighten the adjustment screws to fix its position Attach the mount plate supplied with the WRR 861A 861B 862A 862B 2 Attach the battery pack Audio Input System Japioowey ou dq Bumes z Ja deyo HHH 123 Jaeproowey y dN Bues z saydeyo HAI 124 For details about attaching the battery pack see 7 1 I Using a Battery Pack on page 116 Battery Pack Mount plate supplied with WRR 861A 861B 862A 862B WRR 861A 861B 862A 862B 3 Connect the tuner power cord to the DC OUT connector of the camcorder and the audio output cable to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector Set the LINE AES EBU MIC switch for the channel to which the audio out cable is attached to MIC and set the 48V OFF switch to OFF AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 switch for the channel to which the audio output cable is connected to REAR to AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector to DC OUT connector Audio Input System 7 5 4 Connecting Line Input Audio Equipment Connect the audio output connector of the audio equipment that supplies the line input signal to the AUDIO
270. the Standard Settings Saved in the Reference Piles ecvs 25 c6 cess eesedaisieaccilecduetess 113 6 3 Jumping to a File Related Menu Page When Inserting a Memory SUCK ictisccscidiancucasantinstinaeaneis ercetectineinaeates 114 Chapter 7 Setting Up the Camcorder 7 1 Power SUPPLY ocscesiceneicdeccacsthnesccccticccdictessecwendestacetastans 116 Jalal Using a Battery Packie RSs eecnecntecsstacteoses 116 7 1 2 Avoiding Breaks in Operation Due to an Exhausted Battery 116 7 1 3 Using an AC Adaptor cece eeseccceseeceeseceesseceeneeeeenes 117 7 1 4 Using the Anton Bauer Ultralight System 0 117 7 2 Adjusting the Viewfinde scceeeeeeseereeeeeeeeees 117 7 2 1 Adjusting the Viewfinder Position cceesseeeeeeeees 117 7 2 2 Adjusting the Viewfinder Focus and Screen 118 7 2 3 Detaching the Viewfinder 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeees 118 7 2 4 Detaching the Eyepiece eeeeesseceessceesseeeeeeeeeees 119 7 3 Mounting the Lens ssseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 120 7 4 Adjusting the Flange Focal Length ccccccseeeee 120 7 5 Audio Input System csseecceeeeesseeeeeeeeesseseeeeeeees 121 7 5 1 Using the Supplied Microphone ceseeeseeeesteeeeees 121 7 5 2 Using an External Microphone ceseceesseceeeteeeeees 122 7 5 3 Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner for a UHF Wireless Microphone Sy Stem acssicaccck Ssacsstansevehes
271. the gamma correction on off BLACK GAMMA OFF ON OFF Turns the black gamma correction on off MATRIX OFF ON OFF Turns the linear matrix correction on off KNEE OFF ON ON Turns the knee correction on off WHITE CLIP OFF ON ON Turns the white clipping correction on off DETAIL OFF ON ON Turns the detail signal on off APERTURE OFF ON ON Turns the aperture function on off FLARE ON OFF ON Turns the flare function on off EVS OFF ON OFF Turns the EVS shutter on off TEST SAW OFF ANALG OFF Selects the test signal DIGIT P02 WHITE COLOR TEMP lt A gt Display color 3200 Sets the color temperature of WHITE A temperature Displayed one is a rough guide only C TEMP BAL lt A gt 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the value more precisely when the color temperature adjustment through COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory R GAIN lt A gt 99 to 99 0 Only the value of R GAIN is changed B GAIN lt A gt 99 to 99 0 Only the value of B GAIN is changed 5600K lt A gt OFF ON OFF ee the WHITE A electronic 5600K filter on off COLOR TEMP lt B gt Display color 3200 Sets the color temperature of WHITE B temperature Displayed one is a rough guide only C TEMP BAL lt B gt 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the value more precisely when the color temperature adjustment through COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory R GAIN lt B gt 99 to 99 0 Only the value of R GAIN is changed B GAIN lt B gt 99 to 99 0 Only the value of B GAIN is changed 5600K lt B gt OFF ON OFF ie the WHITE B ele
272. this HD camcorder at the top of its class The camcorder is compatible with multiple formats such as 23 98PsF 24PsF 25PsF 29 97PsF 59 94i and 50i However the camcorder is not compatible with the 60i and 30P formats 1 Abbreviation of Power Hole Accumulated Diode Power HAD is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation Camera signal processing for high quality video The 12 bit A D converter provides stable high quality images and reliability Blur free shooting is ensured by a built in high performance electronic shutter that provides a variety of modes such as ECS mode which reduces flickering on the monitor screen and S EVS mode that improves vertical resolution 1 ECS Extended Clear Scan 2 S EVS Super Enhanced Vertical Definition System Chapter Shooting functions to cope with different shooting conditions The multiple formats allow you to use the camcorder with various applications regardless of shooting format With the scene file function you can easily recall sets of adjustment values from the built in memory to match particular lighting conditions The ATW function provides automatic white balance adjustment in response to changing lighting conditions The TruEye process yields distortion free video even with high intensity colors The TURBO GAIN button enables an instantaneous boost of the video gain to the maximum 42 dB 1 ATW Auto Tracing White balance 2 TruEye T
273. tly synchronized with the external time code When the GENLOCK ON OFF item is set to OFF on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu page 159 the time code cannot be synchronized with the reference video signal In this case set the GENLOCK item to ON on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu User bit settings during time code synchronization When the time code is synchronized only the time data is synchronized with the external time code value Therefore the user bits can have their own settings for each camcorder To synchronize the user bits with external user bit data set the EXT LK UBIT item on the TIMECODE page page 156 of the MAINTENANCE menu to EXT To release the time code synchronization First disconnect the external time code then set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to R RUN To change the power supply from the battery pack to an external power supply during time code synchronization To maintain a continuous power supply connect the external power supply to the DC IN connector before removing the battery pack You may lose time code synchronization if you remove the battery pack first Camera synchronization during time code synchronization During time code synchronization the camera is genlocked to the reference video signal input from the GENLOCK IN connector Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 5 1 Menu Organization and Operation The page number displayed on the top line of the menu may be d
274. tomatically Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to the channel to be adjusted automatically then push the MENU knob 07 AUDIO 3 AU SG 1KHz 3 OFF MIC CH1 LEVEL FRONT MIC CH2 LEVEL FRONT REARI WRR LEVEL SIDE1 REAR2 WRR LEVEL SIDE2 AUDIO SELECT CH3 AUTO AUDIO SELECT CH4 AUTO LUL CONTROL CHS 70 LUL CONTROL CH4 70 When adjusting the audio input level of audio channel 3 Turn the MENU knob to display AUTO then push the MENU knob To adjust the audio input level manually Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the channel to be adjusted manually then push the MENU knob 07 AUDIO 3 U SG 1KHz OFF C CH1 LEVEL FRONT C_CH2 LEVEL ERONT AR1I WRR LEVEL SIDE1 SIDE2 AUDIO SELECT CH3 MANU AUDIO SELECT CH4 AUTO LUL CONTROL CH3 LUL CONTROL CH4 A MI MI RE REAR2 WRR LEVEL When adjusting the audio input level of audio channel 3 Turn the MENU knob to display MANU then push the MENU knob Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to LVL CONTROL CH3 then push the MENU knob Turn the MENU knob until the audio level meter shows up to 20 dB for a normal input volume TurntheMENU gt 4 knob until these 9 bars go on 00 You can adjust the audio input level between 0 and 100 For normal input volume 9 bars from the bottom turn on When the top bar 0 dB turns on the audio input level is too high When th
275. ts or real time each press of this button increments the flashing digit selected by the SHIFT button SHIFT button For setting the time code user bits or real time this button selects the digit to be changed The selected digit flashes PRESET REGEN regeneration CLOCK switch This switch selects whether to set a new time code or to follow the already recorded time code Time Code System PRESET Records time code with a preset initial value REGEN Records time code continuous with the existing time code recorded on the tape Regardless of the setting of the F RUN SET R RUN switch the camcorder operates in R RUN mode CLOCK Records time code synchronized to the internal clock Regardless of the setting of the F RUN SET R RUN switch the camcorder operates in F RUN mode For more information see To make the time code consecutive on page 72 O F RUN SET R RUN free run set recording run switch This switch selects the operating mode for the internal time code generator F RUN Time code keeps advancing regardless of the operating state of the VTR Use this setting when aligning the time code with real time or when synchronizing the time code with an external time code SET Set the switch to this position to set the time code or user bits R RUN The time code value advances only during recording Use this setting to have a consecutive time code on the tape For details see 4 5 1 Setting the Time
276. tus and audio level Audio channel level meter When the CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch is set to CH 1 2 the audio channel level 1 is displayed When the CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch is set to CH 3 4 the audio channel level 3 is displayed Audio channel level meter When the CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch is set to CH 1 2 the ob obs audio channel level 2 is PB NDF EXT LK HOLD a mmmn E displayed LILLI LNL LALI LIH When the CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch is set to CH 3 4 the audio channel level 4 is displayed APE E MENNENE B BA EB RBBB RF SERVO HUMID SLACK 4 Peak aa 2 Battery status indicator F BATT EEEEEG Fully charged Nearly dead BATT flashes Dead battery battery must be charged BATT and E flash Tape status indicator B TAPE EEEREEGS Full at beginning Close to end TAPE flashes End tape must be replaced TAPE and E flash VTR operation status and status indicators Lights during playback NDF EXT LK AAA Li L Lt LELI GELI LJ MIN SEC FRM HOLD oer E over tiir TAPE E Ree BATT ER BBB E Peak ae D Warning indication RF Lights if the recording heads are clogged SERVO Lights if the servo motor fails HUMID Lights if condensation is on the drum SLACK Lights if the tape is not winding properly Fo
277. u T Follow steps 1 and 2 in 5 2 2 Selecting Display Items page 84 until the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu appears on the screen 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to VF DISP MODE then push the MENU knob The mark on the left of VF DISP MODE changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 3 Turn the MENU knob until the desired display mode appears then push the MENU knob The mark returns to a mark and the mark returns to a mark 4 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF 5 2 4 Selecting the Items for Which the P LED is to Light The LED page of the OPERATION menu allows you to select the items for which the indicator is to light up on the viewfinder screen Also the LED STD page allows you to select the lighting conditions Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen 85 sBules pelrejeq pue skejdsiq nuaw g Jeldeyo HMI sbumes p eeq pue sfejdsiq nue g Je deyo HAI 86 CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON while holding down the MENU knob The TOP menu appears Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to OPERATION then push the MENU knob If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the OPERATION menu appears If the menu has been used before the page accessed last app
278. uence 5M gt 10M gt 15M gt 20M lt gt 30M gt 40M gt 50M gt 1H lt gt 2H gt 3H gt 4H gt 5H gt 7H gt 10H gt 15H gt 20H lt gt 30H gt 40H gt 50H 70H gt 100H M minutes H hours 1 1 Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of TAKE TOTAL TIME changes to a mark and the mark changes to a mark 1 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to REC TIME OSOFUNCTIONI ASSIGN SU lt 1 gt ATU ASSIGN SU lt 2 gt _ OFF TURBO SU TURBO FRONT MIC SELECT STREO DF NDF DF END SEARCH OFF CACHEZINTUAL REC A INT TAKE TOTAL TIME 5M REC TIME gt 5SEC PRE LIGHTING OFF 1 3 Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of REC TIME returns to a mark and the mark of the setting returns to a mark 14 Turn the MENU knob until the desired time to be recorded on the tape appears As you turn the MENU knob the setting of REC TIME changes in the following sequence 5SEC gt 10SEC gt 15SEC gt 20SEC gt 30SEC gt 40SEC 50SEC gt IMIN lt gt 2MIN lt gt ae 38MIN 39MIN gt 40MIN SEC seconds MIN minutes 1 You can select a time up to 40MIN for 59 94i 29 97PsF format 48MIN for 50i 25PsF format and 50MIN for 24PsF 23 98PsF format You cannot set a REC TIME that is more than one thirtieth of TAKE TOTAL TIME For example When TAKE TOTAL TIME is set to 1H the maximum value of REC TIME is 2 MIN 60
279. umber of frames LOW LIGHT Appears if set to ON on the menu to indicate the subject illumination is inadequate TAPE REC INH Appears when recording on a write protected cassette Retake Search Failed Appears when the camcorder fails to position the tape at recording starting point when recording using the RE TAKE function Humid Disturbed INT REC Appears when there are portions where recording has failed due to condensation while shooting pictures at intervals using the interval rec function INVALID OPERATION Appears when e there is only one recorded cut when recording using the RE TAKE function e the recorded cuts are less than 3 sec when recording using the RE TAKE function e the RE TAKE function was denied for some reason e g as Picture Cache was on e when you execute the RE TAKE operation before the recording pause operation has completed ON BOARD BATTERY EMPTY Appears when the backup battery for the internal clock has been used up Power OFF amp Manual Eject Indicates that the tape is not wound correctly slacked Turn off the power and then unload the cassette manually 3 Full Top Sensor Error Indicates that the trouble of the full top sensor is detected Replace the full top sensor 1 In this case position the tape at the point where you want to start the recording manually 2 To replace the backup
280. umber of frames and a number from 1 to 64 m the sequence described below is shown 2 While at the top of the current shutter is displayed turn the MENU knob until the desired number of frames appears If you turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise the number of frames changes in the following sequence 1 2 3 4 lt gt 5 lt gt 6 7 4 gt 8 lt gt 16 lt gt 32 gt 64 Lighting SLS 8 FRAME The number of frames changes 10 W A OdB 8F When SLS mode has already been selected the currently selected number of frames is displayed by pushing the MENU knob In this case you can change the number of frames only by turning the MENU knob 660 You can change the number of frames only when is lit The number of frames once selected is retained even after the power of the camcorder is turned off Notes on using the SLS mode e When the SLS mode is selected the following items are limited in functionality AUTO IRIS The iris setting is locked to OPEN Adjust the iris setting manually FLARE correction The setting of FLARE on the SW STATUS page of the PAINT menu is locked to OFF regardless of the setting AWB The longer the exposure time the longer the automatic white balance adjustment time is The following are characteristics of a CCD They are not malfunctions If you select a large number of frames white speckles may appear on the CCD When you
281. umping to the appropriate file related menu page see 6 3 Jumping to a File Related Menu Page When Inserting a Memory Stick on page 114 Memory Sticks usable with this camcorder With this camcorder you can use Memory Sticks whose capacity does not exceed 128 MB For details see Memory Stick in Specifications on page 139 Chapter MEMORY STICK OPEN button 6 1 1 Handling the Memory Stick The Memory Stick can be inserted to or removed from the camcorder with the power turned on or off Inserting the Memory Stick T Push the MEMORY STICK OPEN button The cover of the Memory Stick compartment opens Saving and Loading User Files 2 Hold the Memory Stick with the notch facing downward and the label side facing toward you and insert the Memory Stick into the Memory Stick insertion slot until it clicks into place Then close the cover Label side of Memory Stick If it does not fit into the slot properly or if there is some resistance when you insert it the Memory Stick may be turned around or upside down Do not force the Memory Stick into the slot Confirm the direction of the notch and arrow on the Memory Stick before inserting the Memory Stick and then try inserting it again Removing the Memory Stick Press the MEMORY STICK OPEN button to open the cover of the
282. ure Adjust the value while looking at the real image because the error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature WARM COOL _ Adjusts the value more precisely if the BAL lt A gt adjustment by WARM COOL lt A gt is not satisfactory OFFSET Turns the setting of the offset for WHITE lt B gt channel B ON or OFF ON Adds the offset adjusted on this page to the white balance WARM COOL _ Sets the offset for the white balance lt B gt of channel B using the color temperature Adjust the value while looking at the real image because the error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature WARM COOL _ Adjusts the value more precisely if the BAL lt B gt adjustment by WARM COOL lt B gt is not satisfactory Set the WHITE BAL switch to the position corresponding to the desired channel A or B If the WHITE BAL switch is not set to A or B when you operate the camcorder the adjustment value will not be reflected in the output signal Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item you want to set then push the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob to change the setting then push the MENU knob The mark returns to a gt mark and the mark returns to a mark Adjustments and Settings from Menus To continue setting other item
283. uring the picture in the memory The camcorder stores picture data about 5 seconds worth in memory and then actually records the stored picture data on the tape The tape runs intermittently To stop recording in Single Trigger mode You can stop recording in Single Trigger mode of Manual Rec Interval using the following two methods However the tape may continue to run to record the picture data stored in the memory at the instant the tape stopped e Press the EJECT button Recording e Set the POWER switch to OFF Setting Continuous Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec 1 Follow steps 1 to 9 in Setting Single Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec on page 47 2 Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise to display the desired trigger interval O3OFUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ATW ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt i OFF TURBO SW TURBO STREO DF FRONT MIC SELECT DF NDF END SEARCH OFF CACHE INTVAL REC M INT NUMBER OF FRAME 1 TRIGGER INTERVAL 1SEC PRE LIGHTING EE If you turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise the number changes in the following sequence M gt 1SEC gt 2SEC gt 3SEC 4SEC 5SEC gt 6SEC gt 7SEC lt gt 8SEC 9SEC gt 10SEC gt 15SEC 20SEC gt 30SEC gt 40SEC 50SEC gt IMIN lt gt 2MIN gt 3MIN gt 4MIN lt gt 5MIN lt gt 6MIN gt TMIN gt 8MIN gt 9MIN gt 10MIN gt 15MIN lt gt 20MIN gt 30MIN g
284. use it is removable Memory Stick can also be used for external data storage Memory Stick media are available in three sizes standard size compact Memory Stick Duo size and the smallest Memory Stick Micro M2 size Once attached to a Memory Stick Duo adapter a Memory Stick Duo is the same size as a standard Memory Stick and as a result can be used with products requiring a standard Memory Stick Also once attached to a standard size M2 adaptor a Memory Stick Micro is the same size as a standard Memory Stick and as a result can be used with products requiring a standard Memory Stick 1 M2 is an abbreviation for Micro Memory Stick Types of Memory Stick Memory Stick is available in the following six types to meet various requirements in functions Memory Stick Stores any type of data except copyright protected data that requires the MagicGate copyright protection technology MagicGate Memory Stick Equipped with the MagicGate copyright protection technology Memory Stick MagicGate High Speed Transfer Compatible Equipped with MagicGate copyright protection technology and allows high speed data transfer This type of Memory Stick can be used with products requiring a Memory Stick MagicGate Memory Stick and Memory Stick PRO Your camcorder is not compliant with h
285. val Rec However if the duration the light should be off is less than 5 seconds the light is on continuously When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and the switch of the light is set to ON the light is always on 7 Push the MENU knob The mark on the left of setting returns to a mark and the mark on the left of PRE LIGHTING returns to an mark 8 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF The menu display disappears from the viewfinder screen and the message INTERVAL SEC FRAME indicating Continuous Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec appears along the bottom of the viewfinder SEC indicates the trigger interval preset and FRAME indicates the number of frames preset The display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the viewfinder The settings for Continuous Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec are maintained until changed However if you switch the camcorder power off all Manual Interval Rec mode settings are cleared except for the NUMBER OF FRAME TRIGGER INTERVAL and PRE LIGHTING settings To use Continuous Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec again after switching on the power perform steps 1 and 2 in Setting Single Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec on page 47 Recording in Continuous Trigger mode of Manual Interval Rec When you use blank cassettes such as brand new cassettes be sure to record color bars for more than 2 seconds a
286. vice may be damaged 48V OFF switches Select either of the following positions for the microphones to be connected 48V For a microphone to use an external power supply OFF For a microphone to use an internal power supply AUDIO OUT audio output connector XLR type 5 pin male Outputs the audio signals recorded on audio channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4 The MONITOR switch and CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switches allow you to select the audio signal to be monitored When this connector is not being used attach the supplied XLR connector cover onto it AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 audio channel 1 and channel 2 input connectors XLR type 3 pin female These are audio input connectors for channels 1 and 2 to which you can connect audio equipment or a microphone When the LINE AES EBU MIC selector is set to AES EBU the CH1 connector is used for channel 1 and 2 inputs and the CH2 connector for channel 3 and 4 inputs When the connector is not being used attach the supplied XLR connector cover onto it DC OUT 12 V DC power output connector 4 pin female Supplies power for an optional WRR 861A 861B 862A 862B UHF Portable Tuner Do not connect any equipment other than the UHF portable tuner Audio Functions 21 S 01 U0Q puke Sed JO suonouny pue suoneoogq z 13 deyo N S 01 U09 pUe seq JO suonouny pue suopeooq z saldeup 22 2 4 Shooting and Recording Playback Functions V
287. w magnification Part No A 8262 538 A Lens assembly standard magnification with special compensation for aberrations Part No A 8267 737 A Optical attachments ND filter 1 g ND Part No 3 174 685 01 ND filter 1 4 ND Part No 3 174 683 01 Consult your Sony representative for more information about these filters Equipment for remote control RM B150 B750 Remote Control Unit Memory Stick MSH 32 32 MB MSH 64 64 MB MSH 128 128 MB Audio equipment ECM 674 678 Microphone CAC 12 Microphone Holder CCXA 53 Audio Cable for converting 5 pin connector to two 3 pin connectors WRR 855A 855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit WRR 861A 861B 862A 862B UHF Portable Tuner WRI 8B UHF Transmitter WRR Tuner Fitting service part number A 8278 057 A For Audio equipment described above confirm whether the connector is male or female and the number of pins on the connector The audio input connectors of the camcorder are female and 3 pin and 5 pin and the audio output connectors are male and 5 pin A converting adaptor may be required depending on the audio equipment to be connected to the camcorder Extension boards HKDW 702 Down Converter Board HKDW 703 Picture Cache Board HKDW 902R 2 3 Pull Down Down Converter Board HKDW 905R Slow Shutter and Image Inverter Board Equipment for maintenance and easier handling BCT HD12CL Cleaning Cassette LC DN7 Hard Carrying Case LC DS300SFT Soft Carrying Case Tri
288. wfinder screen Note When you set SHT DISP MODE page 159 to DEG on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu the shutter speed indications in seconds e g 1 100 can be changed to degrees 360 is equivalent to shutter OFF Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment 4 3 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment The reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be changed to aid the shooting of clear pictures of back lit subjects or to prevent blown out highlights The reference value for the lens iris can be set within the following range with respect to the standard value e 0 25 about 0 25 stop further open e 0 5 about 0 5 stop further open e 0 75 about 0 75 stop further open e 1 about 1 stop further open 0 25 about 0 25 stop further closed 0 5 about 0 5 stop further closed 0 75 about 0 75 stop further closed e 1 about 1 stop further closed Changing the reference value T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The page accessed last appears 2 Turn the MENU knob until the AUTO IRIS page appears then push the MENU knob OSOAUTO IRIS OVERRIDE 0 SPEED HIGH LIGHT IRIS IRIS CLIP IRIS IRIS IRIS IRIS IRIS IRIS 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to IRIS OVERRIDE then push the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark
289. y and recorded when you press the VTR START button or VTR button on the lens The following table shows the approximate number of seconds worth of picture data counting back from the time you begin recording that will be recorded from memory However when changing from SAVE to STBY or under the special situations explained in the notes on this page the actual amount of data recorded may be shorter Picture Cache time setting and recording start point Picture Cache Recording start point ume VTR STBY mode VTR SAVE mode About 2 seconds About 2 seconds before before 2 seconds About 1 second before About 1 second before 1 second About 0 seconds before About 0 seconds before 0 seconds 1 For 50i 25PsF 24PsF 23 98PsF format you can record about 5 second of picture data stored in the memory e After selecting the Picture Cache mode immediately changing the Picture Cache time or performing playback or recording review the picture data stored in memory before this operation becomes unstable This means that when you press the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens the previously stored picture data will not be recorded During playback or recording review the picture data is not stored in the HKDW 703 s memory Picture data corresponding to the duration of playback or recording review will not be in memory and will not be recorded on tape Setting procedure

Sony HDW-F900R HDCAM Operation Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents